(logo)
(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Open Source Books | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Additional Collections

Search: Advanced Search

Anonymous User (login or join us)Upload
See other formats

Full text of "The principle of relativity; original papers by A. Einstein and H. Minkowski. Translated into English by M.N. Saha and S.N. Bose; with a historical introd. by P.C. Mahalanobis"

iOO 



T -Pri 



5 b 



ti- 






e 






f 



i ^ * c ; > o 



^ uUo -y^Si 






"A! \ft-Wdu Hi 0/0 
bu V,C. Mr -b\5 







HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION 



Lord Kelvin writing in 1893, in his preface to the 
English edition of Hert/ s Researches on Electric Waves, 
says " many workers and many thinkers have helped to 
build up the nineteenth century school of plenum, one 
ether for light, heat, electricity, magnetism ; and the 
German and English volumes containing Hertz s electrical 
papers, given to the world in the last decade of the 
century, will be a permanent monument of the splendid 
cons jmmation now realised. 

Ten years later, in 1905, we find Einstein declaring 
that "the ether will be proved to be superflous." At 
first sight the revolution in scientific thought brought 
about in the course of a single decade appears to be almost 
too violent. A more careful even though a rapid review 
of the subject will, however, show how the Theory of 
Relativity gradually became a historical necessity. 

Towards the beginning of the nineteenth century, 
the luminiferous ether came into prominence as a result of 
the brilliant successes of the wave theory in the hands 
of Young and Fresnel. In its stationary aspect the 
elastic solid ether was the outcome of the search for a 
medium in which the light waves may "undulate." This 
stationary ether, as shown by Young, also afforded a 
satisfactory explanation of astronomical aberration. But 
its ver\ success; g:ivc rise to a host of new questions all 
bearing on the central problem of relative motion of ether 
and matter. 



11 I lilXC II I.F. OK KKI.m \ m 

Aragd n prism experiment. The refractive index of a 
glass prism depends on the incident velocity of light 
outside the prism and its velocity inside the prism after 
refraction. On Fresnel s fixed ether hypothesis, the 
incident light waves are situated in the stationary ether 
outside the prism and move with velocity c with respect 
to the ether. If the prism moves with a velocity u 
with respect to this fixed ether, then the incident velocity 
of light with respect to the prism should be C + H. Thus 
the refractive index of the glass prism should depend on , 
the absolute velocity of the prism, i.e., its velocity with 
respect to the fixed ether. Arago performed the experiment 
in 1819, but failed to detect the expected change. 

Airy- Boacovitc/i water -telescope experiment. Boscovitch 
had still earlier in i7b t>, raised the very important 
question of the dependence of aberration on the refractive 
index of the medium filling the telescope. Aberration 
depends on the difference in the velocity of light outside 
the telescope and its velocity inside the telescope. If the 
latter velocity changes owing to a change in the medium 
filling the telescope, aberration itself should change, that 
is, aberration should depend on the nature of the medium. 

Airy, in 1871 filled up a telescope with water but 
failed to detect any change in the aberration. Thus we 
get both in the case of Arago pri^m experiment and 
Airy- Boscovitch water-telescope experiment, the very 
startling result that optical effects in a moving medium 
seem to be quite independent of the velocity of the 
medium with respect to Fresnel s stationary ether. 

Fresnel s conrection coefficient /{=] //x 2 . Possibly 
some form of compensation is taking place. \Vorking on 
this hypothesis, Fresnel Offered his famous ether convec 
tion theory. According to Fresnel, the presence of matter 
implies a definite condensation of ether within the 



IIISTOKK \l, I.VII. OIU TI ION 111 

region occupied by matter. This " condensed " or 
e\cr<s portion of ether is supposed to he carried awav 
with its own pice, of moving matter. It should be 
observed that only the "excess" portion is carried away, 
while the rest remains a- -taunant ;is ever. A complete 
convection of the "excess " ether p with the full velocity 
u is optically equivalent to a partial convection of the 
total ether p, with only a fraction of the velocity . u. 
Fresnel showed that if this convection coefficient k is 
l l /fj. 2 (p. being the refractive index of the prism), then 
the velocity of light after refraction within the moving 
prism would be altered to just such extent as would make 
the refractive index of the moving prism quite indepen 
dent of its "absolute" velocity u. The non-dependence 
of aberration on the " absolute " velocity u, is also very 
easily explained with the help of this Fresnelian convection- 
coeflicieut k. 

Stoke** viscous ether. It should be remembered, however, 
that Fresnel s stationary ether is absolutely fixed and is not 
at all disturbed by the motion of matter through it. In this 
respect Fresnelian ether cannot be said to behave in any 
respectable physical fashion, and this led Stokes, in 
1845-H), to construct a more material type of medium. 
Stokes assumed that viscous motion ensues near the surface 
of separation of ether and moving matter, while at 
sulficifiitlv distant unions the ether remains wholly 
undisturbed. He >howed how such a viscous ether would 
explain aberration if all motion in it were differentially 
irrotational. But in order to explain the null Arago 
efl cct. Stoke:- ua.- compelled to assume the convection 
liNpothesis of Fresnel with an identical numerical value 
for k, namely I ./ -. Thus the prestige of the Fresnelian 
convection-cocllicient \va> enhanced, il anything, by the 
theoretical inveBti&fctiona o! stokes. 



IV I KINI U l.K OK RELATIVITY 

Fizratf* experiment.. Soon after, in J8ol, it received 
direct experimental confirmation in a brilliant piece of 
work by Fizeau. 

If a divided beam of light is re-united after passing 
through two adjacent cylinders filled with water, ordinary 
interference fringes will be produced. If the water in one 
of the cylinders is now made to flow, the " condensed " 
ether within the flowing water would be convected and 
would produce a shift in the interference fringes. The 
shift actually observed agreed very well with a value of 
k=l l l^ 1 . The Fresnelian convection-coefficient now 
became firmly established as a consequence of a direct 
positive effect. On the other hand, the negative evidences 
in favour of the convection-coefficient had also multiplied. 
Mascart, Hoek, Maxwell and others sought for definite 
changes in different optical effects induced by the motion 
of the earth relative to the stationary ether. But all such 
attempts failed to reveal the slightest trace of any optical 
disturbance due to the "absolute" velocity of the earth 
thus proving conclusively that all tne different optical 
effects shared in the general compensation arising out of 
the Fresuelian convection of the excess ether. It must be 
earefully noted that the Fresnelian convection-coefficient 
implicitly assumes the existence of a fixed ether (Fresnel) or 
at least a wholly stagnant medium at sufficiently distant 
regions (Stokes), with reference to which alone a convection 
velocity can have any significance. Thus the convection- 
coefficient implying some type of a stationary or viscous, 
yet nevertheless "absolute" ether, succeeded in explaining 
satisfactorily all known optical facts down to 1880. 

Micftelxoti- M or ley Experiment. In 1881, Michelson 
and Morley performed their classical experiments which 
undermined the whole structure of the old ether theory 
and thus served to introduce the new theory of relativity. 



III.VTOUU-U. 1NTIIOIH ( Tlo.N V 

The fundamental idea underlying thift experiment is quite 

simple. In all old experiments the velocity of light 
situated in free ether was compared with the velocity 
of waves actually situated in a piece of moving matter 
and presumably curried away by it. The compensatory 
effect of the Fresnelian convection of ether afforded a 
satisfactory explanation of all negative results. 

In the Michelson-Morley experiment the arrangement is 
quite different. If there is a definite gap j n a rigid body, 
light waves situated in free ether will take a definite time 
in crossing the gap. If the rigid platform carrying the 
gap is set in motion with respect to the ether in the direc 
tion of light propagation, light waves (which are even now 
situated in free ether) should presumably take a longer 
time to cross the gap. 

We cannot do better than quote Eddington s descrip 
tion of this famous experiment. " The principle of the 
experiment may be illustrated by considering a swimmer in 
a river. It is easily realized that it takes longer to swim 
to a point 50 yards up-stream and back than to a point 50 
yards across-stream and back. If the earth is moving 
through the ether there is a river of ether Howing through 
the laboratory, and a wave of light may be compared to a 
swimmer travelling with constant velocity relative to the 
current. If, then, we divide a beam of light into two parts, 
and send one-half swimming up the stream for a certain 
distance and then (by a mirror) back to the starting 
jx)int, and setul the other half an equal distance across 
stream and back, the across-stivam beam should arrive 
back first. 

Let the ether be llowinir relative to 
o the apparatus with velocity -n. in the 

n direct ion () . and let OA , OB, be 
B the two arms of the apparatus of equal 



VI I KINCIL LK OF KKLATUITY 

length /, OA being placed up-stream. Let < be the 
velocity of light. The time for the double journey along 
OA and back is 

/ = -- + / = ^ = 2I B* 
c if r + n r s ^l z c 

where 8= (1 n z /c" )"*, a factor greater than unity. 

For the transverse journey the light must have a compo 
nent velocity n up-stream (relative to the ether) in order to 
avoid being carried below OB : and since its total velocity 
is <, its component across-stream must be \/(c" 2 ), the 
time for the double journey OB is accordingly 



But when the experiment was tried, it was found that 
both parts of the beam took the same time, as tested by 
the interference bauds produced." 

After a most careful series of observations; Michelson 
and Morley failed to detect the slightest trace of any 
effect due to earth s motion through ether. 

The Michelson-Morley experiment seems to show that 
there is no relative motion of ether and matter. Fresnel s 
stagnant ether requires a relative velocity of 11. Thus 
Miehelsou and Morley themselves thought at iirst that their 
e\]H rinient eoniirmed Stokes viscous ether, in which no 
relative motion can ensue on account of the abs.MK r of 
slipping of ether :i,t the :- -niTrice of separation. Hut even 
on Stokes theory this viscous How of ether would fall 
off at a very rapid rate as we recede from the surface 
of separation. Michelson and Morley repeated their experi 
ment at different heights from the surface of the earth, but 
invariably obtained the sttme negative results, thus failing 
to confirm Stokes theory of viscous Mow. 



II ISTOIMCAI, INTKOlim TION Til 

o//. Further, in l.V. - i, Lodge per 
formed his rotating sphere experiment wiiich should 
complete absence of any viscous How of ether due to 
moving masses of matter. A divided beam of light, after 
repeated reflections within a very narrow gap between two 
massive hemispheres. \\-;is allowed to re-unite and thus 
produce interference bands. When the two hemispheres 
are set rotating, it is conceivable that the ether in the gap 
would be disturbed due to viscous How, and any such flow 
would be immediately detected by a disturbance of the 
interference bands. But actual observation failed to 
detect the slightest disturbance of the ether in the gap, 
due to the motion of tbe hemispheres. Lodge s experi 
ment thus seems to show a complete absence of any viscous 
flow of ether. 

Apart from these experimental discrepancies, grave 
theoretical objections were urged against a viscous ether. 
Stokes himself had shown that his ether must be incom 
pressible and all motion in it differentially irrotational, 
at the same time there should be absolutely no slipping at 
the surface of separation. Now all these conditions cannot 
be simultaneously satisfied for any conceivable material 
medium without certain very special and arbitrary assump 
tions. Thus Stokes ether failed to satisfy the very motive 
which had led Stokes to formulate it, namely, the desirabi 
lity of constructing a " physical" medium. Planck offered 
modified forms of >tokes theory which seemed capable of 
being reconciled with the Micheleon-Morley experiment, 
but required very special assumpt ions. The very complexitv 
and the very arbitrariness of these assumptions prevented 
Planck s ether from attaining any degree of practical 
importance in the further development of the subject. 

The sole criterion of the value of any scientific theory 
must ultimately be its capacity for offering a simple, 



Vlll PRINCIPLE OK It K NATIVITY 

unified, coherent and fruitful description of observed facts. 
In proportion as a theory becomes complex it loses in 
usefulness a theory which is obliged to requisition a 
whole array of arbitrary assumptions in order to explain 
special facts is practically worse than useless, as it serves 
to disjoin, rather than to unite, the several groups of facts. 
The optical experiments of the last quarter of the nine 
teenth century showed the impossibility of constructing a 
simple ether theory, which would be simenable to analytic 
treatment and would at the same time stimulate further 
progress. It should be observed that, it could scarcely be 
shown that no logically consistent ether theory was 
possible; indeed in 1910, H- A. Wilson offered a consis- 
sent ether theory which was at least quite neutral with 
respect to all available optical data. But Wilson s ether 
is almost wholly negative, its only virtue being that it 
does not directly contradict observed facts. Neither any 
direct confirmation nor a direct refutation is possible and 
it does not throw any light on the various optical pheno 
mena. A theory like this being practically useless stands 
self-condemned- 

We must now consider the problem of relative motion of 
ether and matter from the point of view of electrical theory. 
From 1860 the identity of light as an electromagnetic 
vector became gradually established as a result of the 
brilliant "displacement current" hypothesis of Clerk 
Maxwell and his further -analytical investigations. The 
elastic solid ether became gradually transformed into the 
electromagnetic one. Maxwell succeeded in giving a fairly 
satisfactory account of all ordinary optical phenomena 
;vnd little room was left for any serious doubts as regards 
the general validity of Maxwell s theory. Hertz s re 
searches on >lectric waves, first carried out in l^Mi, 
succeeded in furnishing a Mrong experimental confirmation 



MMi U, INTRODUCTION IX 



of Maxwell s thenn. Klef-tric waves behaved 
like light waves of ven lar^e wave length. 

Tlie orthodox Maxwellian view located the dielectric 
polarisation in fte electromagnetic el her which was merely 
a transformation of iVe-ncl s stagnant ether. The Mag 

netic polarisation was looked upon as wholly Secondary m 
origin, being due to the relative motion of the dielectric 
tul.i- of polarisation. On this view the Fresnelian con- 
vcetion r-octllcient comes out to he i, as shown by J. J. 
Thomson in 1880, instead of I 1 //*- as required by 
optical experiments. This obviously implies a complete 
failure to account for all those optical experiments which 
depend for their satisfactory explanation on the assumption 
of a value for the eonvect.ion coefficient equal to 1 l //* 2 . 

The modifications proposed independently by Her!/ and 
Heaviside fare no better.* They postulated the actual 
medium to be the seat of all electric polarisation and further 
emphasised the reciprocal relation subsisting between 
electricity and magnetism, thus making the field equations 
more symmetrical. On this view the whole of the 
polarised ether is carried away by the moving medium, 
and consequentty, the convection co-efficient naturally 
becomes unity in this theory, a value quite as discrepant 
as that obtained on the original Maxwellian assumption. 

Thus neither Maxwell s original theory nor its subse 
quent modifications as developed by llertx. and Heaviside 
succeeded in obtaining a \alne for Fresnelian co-efficient 
equal to 1 1 1^- , and consequently stood totally condemned 
from the optical point of view. 

Certain direct electromagnetic experiments involving- 
relative motion of polarised dielectrics were no less conclu 
sive against the generalised theory of Hertx and Heaviside. 

* See Note 1. 



X HKIXC1PLE OF RELATIVITY 

According to Hertz a moving dielectric would carry away 
the whole of its electric displacement with it. Hence the 
electromagnetic effect near the moving dielectric would 
be proportional to the total electric displacement, that is 
to K, the specific inductive capacity of the dielectric. In. 
1901, Blondlot working with a stream of moving gas 
could not detect any such effect. H. A. Wilson repeated 
the experiment in an improved form in 1903 and working 
with ebonite found that the observed effect was pro 
portional to K 1 instead of to K. For gases K is nearly 
equal to 1 and hence practically no effect will be observed 
in their case. This gives a satisfactory explanation of 
Blondlot s negative results. 

Rowland had shown in L876 that the magnetic force 
due to a rotating condenser (the dielectric remaining 
stationary) was proportional to K, the sp. ind. cap. On 
the other hand, Rontgen found in 1888 the magnetic 
effect due to a rotating dielectric (the condenser remain 
ing stationary) to be proportional to K 1, and not to 
K. Finally Eichenwald in 1903 found that when both 
condenser and dielectric are rotated together, the effect 
observed was quite independent of K, a result quite 
consistent with the two previous experiments. The Row 
land effect proportional to K, together with the opposite 
Rontgen effect proportional to 1 K, makes the Eichenwald 
effect independent of K. 

All these experiments together with those of Blondlot 
and Wilson made it clear that the electromagnetic 
effect due to a moving dielectric was proportional to 
K 1, and not to K as required by Hertz s theory. Thus 
the above group of experiments with moving dielectrics 
directly contradicted the Hertz- Heaviside theory. The 
internal discrepancies inherent in the classic ether theory 
had now become too prominent. It wao clear that the 



III-TOUK \i. i\ii:oi>rcTifW xi 

H her row-opt had finally outgrown its usefulness. The 
observed ! ;,<(> had become too contradictory and too 
heterogeneous to be reduced to an organised whole with 
tin- help of the ether concept alone. Radical departures 
from the classical theory had become absolutely necessary. 

There were several outstanding difficulties in connec 
tion with anomalous dispersion, selective reflection and 
selective absorption which could not be satisfactory 
explained in the classic electromagnetic theory. It 
was evident that the assumption of some kind of 
discreteness in the optical meduim had become inevit 
able. Such an assumption naturally gave rise to an 
atomic theory of electricity, namely, the modern electron 
theory. Lorentz had postulated the existence of electrons 
so early as 1878, but it was not until some years later that 
the electron theory became firmly established on a satisfac 
tory basis. 

Lorentz assumed that a moving dielectric merely carried 
away its own " polarisation doublets," which on his theory 
gave rise to the induced field proportional to K 1. The 
field near a moving dielectric is naturally proportional to 
K 1 and not to K. Lorentz s theory thus gave a 
satisfactory explanation of all those experiments with 
moving dielectrics which required effects proportional to 
K 1. Lorentz further succeeded in obtaining a value for 
the Fresnelian convection coefficient equal to 1 *//**, the 
exact value required by all optical experiments of the 
moving type. 

\VC must now go back to Michelson and Morley s 
experiment. We have seen that both parts of the beam 
are situated in free ether ; no material raeduim is involved 
in any portion of the paths actually traversed by the beam. 
Consequently no compensation due to Fresnelian convection 



Til I lMM II IK OK lU-.LATIVITY 

of ether by moving medium is poi-sible. Thus Kre-nelian 
convection compensation can have no possible application 
in this case. Yet some marvellous compensation has 
evidvuily taken place which has completely m;i<ke.d the 
" absolute " velocity of the earth. 

In Michelson and Morley s experiment, the distance 
travelled by the beam along OA (that is, in a direction 
parallel to the motion of the platform) is //8 2 , while the 
distance travelled by the beam along 1 OB, perpendicular to 
the direction of motion of the platform, is %l(3. Yet the 
most careful experiments showed, as Eddington says, " that 
both parts of the beam took the same time as tested by the 
interference bands produced. It would seem that OA and 
OB could not really have been of the same length ; and if 
OB was of length /, OA must have been of length 1 1 ft. The 
apparatus was now rotated through 90, so that OB became 
the up-stream. The time for the two journeys was again 
the same, so that OB must now be the shorter length. The 
plain meaning of the experiment is that both arms have a 
length I when placed along Oi/ (perpendicular to the direc 
tion of motion), and automatically contract to a length 
1/J3, when placed along O/ (parallel to the direction of 
motion). This explanation was first given by Fitz-Gerald." 

This Fitz-Gerald contraction, startling enough in 
itself, does not suffice. Assuming this contraction to he a 
real one, the distance travelled with respect to the ether is 
"11(3 and the time taken for this journey is :V/^ r. But the 
distance travelled with respect to the platform is always 
2/. Hence the velocity of light with respect to the plat- 

2,1 8 
form is 2// " fi/P, a variable quantity depending on 

the " absolute " velocity of the platform. But no trace 
of such an effect has ever been found. The velocity of 
light is always found to be quite independent of the velocity 



HI>Toi:l< A I IVil:Ml IIM\ XIII 

1^1 ilic plat I m in. The < precent dfffioolty cannot \>u solved 

h\ .my further alteration in the measure of space. The 
recount left open i-: to alter the measure ol time an 
well, that K, to adopt t lie conecpt of * loea I t line." If a mov 
ing clock goes slower so that one real second becomes 1 ft 
second as measured in the moving system, I lie velocity of 
light relative to the platform will always remain c. We 
must ad.-pt two very startling hypotheses, namely, the 
Fit/ (lerald contraction and the concept of "local time," 
in order to give a satisfactory explanation of the 
Miehelson-Morley experiment. 

These results were already reached by Lorentz in the 
course of further developments of his electron theory. 
Lorentx used a special set of transformation equations* for 
time which implicitly introduced the concept of local time. 
But he himself failed to attach any special significance to 
it, and looked upon it rather as a mere mathematical 
artiliee like imaginary quantities in analysis or the circle 
at infinity in projective geometry. The originality of 
Einstein at tins singe consists in his successful physical 
interpretation of these result?, and viewing them as the 
coherent organised consequences of a single general 
principle. Lorentz established the Relativity Theoremt 
(consisting men-iy . ) a set of transformation equations) 
while Kinstein generalised it into a Universal Principle. In 
addition Einstein introduced fundamentally new concepts 
of space and time, which served to destroy old fetishes and 
demanded a wholesale revision of scientific concepts and 
thus opened up new possibilities in the synthetic unification 
of natural processes. 

Newton had framed his laws of motion in such a \\-.\\ 
as to make then; quite Independent of the absolute velocity 



* See \ 

t See Note 4. 



XIV I RINTIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

of the earth. Uniform relative motion of ether and matter 
could not be detected with the help of dynamical laws. 
According to Einstein neither could it be detected with the 
help of optical or electromagnetic experiments. Thus the 
Einsteinian Principle of Relativity asserts that all physical 
laws are independent of the absolute velocity of an observer. 
For different systems, the form of all physical laws is 
conserved. If we chose the velocity of light* to be the 
fundamental unit of measurement for all observers (that is, 
assume the constancy of the velocity of light in all systems) 
we can establish a metric " one one " correspondence 
between any two observed systems, such correspondence 
depending only the relative velocity of the two systems. 
Einstein s Relativity is thus merely the consistent logical 
application of the well known physical principle thai \ve 
can know nothing but relative motion. In this sense it is 
a further extension of Newtonian Relativity. 

On this interpretation, the Lorentz- Fitzgerald contrac 
tion and "local time" lose their arbitrary character. Space 
and time as measured by two different, observers are natur 
ally diverse, and the difference depends only on their relative 
motion. Both are equally valid; they are merely different 
descriptions of the same physical reality. This is essentially 
the point of view adopted by Minkowski. He considers time 
itself to be one of the co-ordinate axes, and in his four- 
dimensional world, that is in the space-time reality, relative 
motion is reduced to a rotation of the axes of reference. 
Thus, the diversity in the measurement of lengths and 
temporal rates is merely due to the static difference in the 
" frame-work " of the different observers. 

The above theory of Relativity absorbed praeticalh 
the whole of the electromagnetic theory based on the 

* See Notes 9 and 12. 



HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION XV 

M;i\\\ell-|,orenU system of field equations. It combined 
all the advantages ( >| classic Maxvvelliaa theory together 
with an electronic hypothesis. The Lorentx assumption of 
polarisation doublets had furnished a satisfactory explana 
tion ..f flu- r re^nelian convection of ether, but in the new 
theory 1 his is deduced merely as a consequence of the altered 
concept of relative velocity. In addition, the theory of 
Relativity accepted the results of Michelson and Morley s 
experiments as a definite principle, namely, the principle of 
the constancy of the velocity of light, so that there was 
nothing left for explanation in the Michelson-Morley 
experiment. But even more than all this, it established a 
single general principle which served to connect together 
in a simple coherent and fruitful manner the known facts 
of Physics. 

The theory of Relativity received direct experimental 
coiifii -illation in several directions. Repeated attempts were 
made to detect the Lorentz-Fitzgerald contraction. Any 
ordinary physical contraction will usual Iv have observable 
physical results ; for example, the total electrical resistance 
of a conductor will diminish. Trouton and Noble, Trouton 
and Rankine, Rayleigh and Brace, and others employed 
a variety of different methods to detect the Lorentz- 
Fitzgerald contraction, but invariably with the same 
negative results. Whether there ix an, ether or not, 
uniform rrforily ////// r, x]><>ct to if can never be detected. 
This does not prove that there is no such thing as an 
ether but certainly does render the ether entirely super 
fluous. Universal compensation is due to a change in local 
units of length and time, or rather, IxMtig merely different 
descriptions of the same reality, there is no compensation 
at all. 

There was another group of observed phenomena which 
could scarcely be fitted into a Newtonian scheme of 



XVI PRIXCIPLE OF 

dynamic^ without doing violence to it. The experimental 
work of Kaufmann, in 1901, made it abundantly clear that 
the " mass v of an electron depended on its velocity. "<> 
early as 1881, J. J. Thomson had shown that tlie inert in of 
a charged particle increased with its velocity. Abraham 
now deduced a formula for the variation of mass with 
velocity, on the hypothesis that an electron always remain 
ed a riyid sphere. Lorentz proceeded on the assumption 
that the electron shared in the Lorentz- Fitzgerald contrac 
tion and obtained a totally different formula. A very 
careful series of measurements carried out independently b\ 
Biicherer, Wolz, Htipka and finally Neumann in 1913, 
decided conclusively in favour of the Lorentz formula. 
This "contractile" formula follows immediately as a direct 
consequence of the new Theory of Relativity, without any 
assumption as regards theVlectrical origin of inertia. Thus 
the complete agreement of experimental facts with the 
predictions of the new theory must be considered as 
confirming it as a principle which goes even beyond the 
electron itself. The greatest triumph of this new theory 
consists, indeed, in the fact that a large number of results, 
winch had formerly required all kinds of special hypotheses 
for their explanation, are now deduced very simply as 
inevitable consequences of one single general principle. 

We have now traced the history of the development of 
the restricted or special theory of Relativity, which is 
mainly concerned with optical and electrical phenomena. 
It was first offered by Kiustein in 1905. Ten years later, 
Einstein formulated his second theorv, the ( Jcncralised 
Principle of Relativity. This new theory is mainly a theory 
of gravitation and has very little connection with optics 
and electricity. In one sense, the second theory is indeed 
a further generalisation of the restricted principle, but the 
former does not really contain the latter as a special case. 



>i;u AI, iNTHonn riOV 



iii s li -v.t theon is re-tricted in tlu- EWDBC that it 
only refers to uniform rect iliniar motion and has no appli 
cation to any kind of accelerated movements. Einstein in 
hi- second theory extends the Relativity Principle to cases 
ol accelerated motion. If Relativity is to be universallv 
true, ti.en e\vn accelerated motion must be merely rt lativf 
nint in, i ln l n ct ii mutter and HI after. Hence the Generalised 
Principle of Relativity asserts that "absolute" motion 
cannot be detected even with the help of gravitational IRWH. 

All in vements must be referred to definite sets of 
co-ordinate axes. If there is any chaiiLjf of axes, the 
numerical magnitude of the movements will also change. 
Bui according to Newtonian dynamics, such alteration in 
physical movements can only be due to the effect of ceitain 
1 orces in the field.* Thus any change of axes will introduce 
new geometrical" forces in the field which are quite 
independent of the nature of the body acted on. Gravitation 
al forces also have this same remarkable property, and 
gravitation itself may be of essentially the same nature as 
the.-e " geometrical" forces introduced by a change of axes. 
This loids to Einstein s famous Principle of Equivalence. 
A i/i <ifl/nl innal Jield of force in xtrictly equivalent to one 
introduced // </ tfantforatation <>f co-ordtunfey and nopQwiltfo 
t .r/if. i / ; fiif ft it ilixtiiKinixh between the two. 

Thus it mav hecome possible to "transform away " 
gravitational elTect-^. at least For sufficiently small region^ ol 
space, bv referring all movements to a new set of axes. This 
new framework" may of course have all kinds of very 
complicated movements when referred to the old Galilean 
or "rectangular unarceleraled syslem of co-ordinate-." 

But there is no reason why we should look upt.n the 
Galilean s\>tein ,i> more I liiHlainenlal than any other. If it 



XV1I1 PUIXCIPLE OF BELATIVITY 

is found simpler to refer all motion in a gravitational field 
to a special set of co-ordinates, we may certainly look upon 
this special "framework" (at least for the particular region 
concerned), to be more fundamental and more natural. We 
may, still more simply, identify this particular framework 
with the special local properties of space in that region. 
That is, we can look upon the effects of a gravitational 
h eld as simply due to the local properties of space and time 
itself. The very presence of matter implies a modification 
of the characteristics of space and time in its neighbour 
hood. As Eddington saj s " matter does not cause the 
curvature of space-time. It is the curvature. Just as 
light does not cause electromagnetic oscillations; it is the 
oscillations." 

We may look upon this from a slightly different point 
of view. The General Principle of Relativity asserts that 
all motion is merely relative motion between matter and 
matter, and as all movements must be referred to definite 
sets of co-ordinates, the ground of any possible framework 
must ultimately be material in character. It /* convenient 
to take the matter actually present in a field as the 
fundamental ground of our framework. If this is done, 
the special characteristics of our framework would naturally 
depend on the actual distribution of matter in the field. 
But physical space and time is completely defined by the 
" framework." In other words the " framework " itself ? < 
space and time. Hence we see how //////*/ v// space and time 
is actually defined by the local distribution of matter. 

There are certain magnitudes which remain constant by 
any change of axes. In ordinary geometry distance 
between two points is one such magnitude ; so that 
&r 2 +Sy- +5?- is an invariant. In the restricted theory of 
light, the principle of constancy of light velocity demands 
that Saf*+fy*+Sa*c*Sl* should remain constant. 



IIISIOI;K \i. i vntoiM ( iiox xix 

The *i /m?nti ni </\ oi adjacent events is defined by 
ftx* = -,/./ 2 -////- _,/ : v+,.-V/-. It is :ui extrusion of tin- 
notion of distance and this is the ne\v invariant. Now if 
.*, //, :, I are transformed to any set of new variables 
j-,, . ,, ..., ./.,, we shall got a quadratic expression for 
,/.s- = //! r r,- + fy, 8 .v.j + . = ;></, i,.<v, where them s are 
functions of ./,,./,, .r.p # 4 depending on the transforma 
tion. 

The special properties of space and time in any region 
are defined by these // s which are themselves determined 
by the actual distribution of matter in the locality. Thus 
from the Newtonian point of view, these # s represent the 
gravitational effect of matter while from the Relativity 
stand-point, these merely define the non-Newtonian (and 
incidentally non-Euclidean) spice in the neighbourhood of 
matter. 

We have seen that Einstein s theory requires local 
curvature of space-time in the neighbourhood of matter. 
Such altered characteristics of space and time give a 
satisfactory explanation of an outstanding discrepancy in 
the observed advance of perihelion of Mercury. The large 
discordance is almost completely removed by Einstein s 
theory. 

Again, in an intense gravitational field, a beam of light 
will be affected by the local curvature of space, so that to 
an observer who is referring all phenomena to a Newtonian 
system, the beam of light will appear to deviate from its 
path along an Euclidean straight line. 

This famous prediction of Einstein about the deflection 
of a beam of light by the sun s gravitational field was 
tested during the total solar eclipse of May, 19 IS*. The 
observed deflection is decisively in favour of the Generalised 
Theory of Relativity. 



XX I KI Vril I.K OK KKLATIVITY 

It should be noted however that the velocity of light 
itself would decrease in a gravitational field. This may 
appear at first sight to be a violation of the principle of 
constancy of light-velocity. But when we remember that 
the Special Theory is explicitly restricted to the case of 
unaccelerated motion, the difficulty vanishes. In the 
absence of a gravitational field, that is in any unaccelerated 
system, the velocity of light will always remain constant. 
Thus the validity of the Special Theory is completely 
preserved within its own rextrictwl field. 

Einstein has proposed a third crucial test. He has 
predicted a shift of spectral lines towards the red, due to an 
intense gravitational potential. Experimental difficulties 
are very considerable here, as the shift of spectral lines is a 
complex phenomenon. Evidence is conflicting and nothing 
conclusive can yet be asserted. Einstein thought that a 
gravitational displacement of the Praunhofer lines is a 
necessary and fundamental condition for the acceptance of 
his theory. But Eddington has pointed out that even if 
this test fails, the logical conclusion would seem to be that 
while Einstein s law of gravitation is true for matter in 
bulk, it is not true for such small material systems as 
atomic oscillator. 

CONCLUSION 

From the conceptual stand-point theiv are several 
important consequences of the Generalised or Gravitational 
Theory of Relativity. Physical space-time is perceived to 
be intimately connected with the actual local distribution 
of matter. Euclid-Newtonian space-time is not the actual 
space-time of Physics, simply because the former completely 
neglects the actual presence of matter. Euclid-Newtonian 
continuum is merely an abstraction, while physical spnn- 
time is the actual framework which has some definite 



MlST.HiU-.M. INTKOIirrnnN XXI 

curvature due to the presence of matter Gravitational 
Thrnrv of Relativity tlius brings out clearly the funda 
mental distinction between actual physical space-time 
(which is non-isotropk" and non- Euclid-Newtonian) on one 
hand and the abstract Euclid-Newtonian continuum (which 
is homogeneous, iaotropio and a purely intellectual construc 
tion) on the other. 

The measurements of the rotation of the earth reveals a 
fundamental framework which may be called the " inertial 
framework. 1 This constitutes the actual physical universe. 
This universe approaches Galilean space-time at a great 
distance from matter. 

The properties of this physical universe may be referred 
to some world-distribution of matter or the "inertial frame 
work" may be constructed by a suitable modification of the 
law of gravitation itself. In Einstein s theory the actual 
curvature of the " inertial framework " is referred to vast 
quantities of undetected world-matter. It has interesting 
consequences. The dimensions of Einsteinian universe 
would depend on the quantity of matter in it; it would 
vanish to a roint in the total absence of matter. Then 
again curvature depends on the quantity of matter, and 
hence in the presence of a sufficient quantity of matter space- 
time may curve round and close up. Eiusteinian universe 
will then reduce to a finite system without boundaries, like 
the surface of a sphere. In this "closed up" system, 
light rays will come to a focus after travelling round the 
universe and we should see an <f anti-sun" (corresponding to 
the back surface of the sun) at a point in the sky opposite 
to the real sun. This anti-sun would of course be equally 
large and equally bright if there is no absorption of light 
in free space. 

In de Sitter s theory, the existence of vast quantities of 
world-matter is not required. But beyond a definite 



Xxii I Rl. \CIPLK OF HKL.VTIVITY 

distance from an observer, time itself stands still, so that 
to the observer nothing can ever " happen " there. All 
these theories are still highly speculative in character, but 
they have certainly extended the scope of theoretical physics 
to the central problem of the ultimate nature of the 
universe itself. 

One outstanding peculiarity still attaches to the concept 
of electric force it is not amenable to any process of being 
"transformed away" by a suitable change of framework. 
H. Weyl, it seems, has developed a geometrical theory (in 
hyper-space) in which no fundamental distinction is made 
between gravitational and electrical forces. 

Einstein s theory connects up the law of gravitation 
with the laws of motion, and serves to establish a very 
intimate relationship between matter and physical space- 
time. Space, time and matter (or energy) were considered 
to be the three ultimate elements in Physics. The restricted 
theory fused space-time into one indissoluble whole. The 
generalised theory has further synthesised space-time and 
matter into one fundamental physical reality. Space, time 
and matter taken sejarately are more abstractions. Physical 
reality consist** of a synthesis of all three. 

P. C. MAHALAXOBIS. 



II I-TOKIC A I, INTRODUCTION XX111 



Note A. 

For example consider a massive particle resting on a 
circular disc. If \ve set the disc rotating, a centrifugal force 
appears in the Held. On the other hand, if we transform 
to a set of rotating axes, we must introduce a centrifugal 
force in order to correct for the change of axes. This 
newly introduced centrifugal force is usually looked upon 
as a mathematical fiction as "geometrical" rather than 
physical. The presence of such a geometrical force is usually 
interpreted us being due to the adoption of a fictitious 
framework. On the other hand a gravitational force is 
considered quite real. Thus a fundamental distinction is 
made between geometrical and gravitational forces. 

In the General Theory of Relativity, this fundamental 
distinction is done away with. The very possibility of 
distinguishing between geometrical and gravitational forces 
is denied. All axes of reference may now be regarded as 
equally valid. 

In the Restricted Theory, all "unaccelerated" axes of 
reference were recognised as equally valid, so that physical 
laws were made independent of uniform absolute velouitv. 
In the General Theory, physical laws are made independent 
of "absolute" motion of any kind. 



On 
The Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies 



Bl 

A. El \STKIN. 



INTRODUCTION. 

It is well known thai if we attempt to apply Maxwell s 
electrodynamics, as conceived at the present time, to 
moving bodies, we are led to assymetry which does not 
aijrec with observed phenomena. Let u* think of the 
mutual action between n magnet and a conductor. The 
observed phenomena, in this case depend only on the 
relative motion of the conductor and the magnet, while 
according to the usual conception, a distinction must be 
made between the cases where the one or the other of the 
bodies is in motion. If, for example, the magnet moves 
and the conductor is at rest, then an electric held of certain 
energy-value is produced in the neighbourhood of the 
magnet, which excites a current in those parts of the 
field where a conductor exists. But. if the magnet be at 
rest and the conductor be set in motion, no electric tield 
is produced in the neighbourhood of the magnet, but an 
electromotive force which corresponds to no energy in 
itself is produced in the conductor; this causes an electric 
current of the same magnitude and the <:ime career as the 
electric force, it being of course assumed that the iclative 
motion in both of these eas.^ is the 



I RINCIPLE OF RRLATIV1TY 

2. Examples of a similar kind such as the unsuccessful 
attempt to substantiate the motion of the earth relative 
to the " Light-medium " lead us to the supposition that 
not only in mechanics, but also in electrodynamics, no 
properties of observed facts correspond to a concept of 
absolute rest; but that for all coordinate systems for which 
the mechanical equations hold, the equivalent electrodyna- 
mical and optical equations hold also, as has already been 
shown for magnitudes of the first order. In the following 
we make these assumptions (which we shall subsequently 
call the Principle of Relativity) and introduce the further 
assumption, an assumption which is at the first sight 
quite irreconcilable with the former one that light is 
propagated in vacant space, with a velocity which is 
independent, of the nature of motion of the emitting 
body. These two assumptions are quite sufficient to gu-e 
us a simple and consistent theory of electrodynamics of 
moving bodies on the basis of the Maxwellian theory for 
bodies at rest. The introduction of a " Lightather" 
will be proved to be superfluous, for according to the 
conceptions which will be developed, we shall introduce 
neith er a space absolutely at rest, and endowed with 
special properties, nor shall we associate a velocity- vector 
with a point in which electro-magnetic processes take 
place. 

3. Like every other theory in electrodynamics, the 

theory is based on the kinematics of rigid bodies; in t he- 
enunciation of every theory, we have to do with relations 
between rigid bodies (co-ordinate system), clocks, and 
electromagnetic processes. An insufficient consideration 
of these circumstances is the cause of difficulties with 
which the electrodynamics of moving bodies have to fi^ht 
at present. 



.HI ELECTRODYXAMH^ "F MoVfVO BODIES 4 

I.-KINEMATXOAL PORTION. 

1. Definition of Synchronism. 

l^t us hrivc a co-ordinate system, in which the New 
tonian equations hold. For distinguishing this system 
from another which will be introduced hereafter, we 
shall always call it " the stationary system." 

If a material point-be at rest in this system, then its 
position in this system nan be found out by a measuring 
rod, and can be expressed by the methods of Euclidean 
Oeometry, or in Cartesian co-ordiuates. 

If we wish to describe the motion of a material point, 
the values of its coordinates must be expressed as functions 
of time. It is always to be borne in mind that such a 

nt/h-ntultcrtt ilcfniKlnn has a physical sense t only when ice 
lhi\-i it i. f.i;i,- ,><>//>, /i /// n /i il. /.v tiifttut l>y tiMf. Jt f have to 
dike into consideration l.h<> fact that those of our conceptions, in 
/>///<>// time /i!<ii/x a part, are al ^nyx conception* of synchronism 
For example, we say that a train arrives here at 7 o clock ; 
this moans that the exact pointing of the little hand of my 
watch to 7, and the arrival of the train are synchronous 
events. 

It may appear that all difficulties connected with the 
definition of time can be removed when in place of time, 
we substitute the position of the little hand of my watch. 
Such a definition is in fact sufficient, when it is required to 
ilelinr timt- exclusively for the place at which the clock is 
stationed, hut the definition is not sufficient when it is 
required to connect by time events taking place at different 
station*, or what amounts to the same thing, to estimate 
by means of time (zeitlich werten) the occurrence of events, 
take place at stations distant from the clock. 



4 JMIINCII LL <)i Khl.ATIVm 

Now with regard to this attempt; the time-estimation 
of events, we can satisfy ourselves in the following 
manner. Suppose an observer who is stationed at the 
origin of coordinates with the clock associates a ray of 
light which comes to him through space, and gives testimony 
to the event of which the time is to be estimated, with 
the corresponding position of the hands of the clock. But 
such an association has this defect, it depends on the 
position of the observer provided with the clock, as we 
know by experience. AVe can attain to a more practicable 
result by the following treatment. 

If an observer be stationed at A with a clock, he can 
estimate the time of events occurring in the immediate 
neighbourhood of A, by looking for the position of 
the hands of the clock, which are syrchrouous with 
the event. If an observer be stationed at B with a 
clock, we should add that the clock is of the same nature 
as the one at A, he can estimate the time of events 
occurring about B. But without further premises, it is 
not possible to compare, as far as time is concerned, the 
events at B with the events at A. We have hitherto an 
A-time, and a B-time, but no time common to A and B. 
This last ,time (i.e., common time) can be defined, if we 
establish by definition that the time which light requires 
in travelling from A to B is equivalent to the time which 
light requires in travelling from B to A. For example, 
a ray of light proceeds from A at A-time t towards B, 

arrives and is reflected from B at B-time t and returns 
to A at A-time t . According to the definition, both 

A 

clocks are synchronous, it 



u.Y Till, KLI.t IKOm N .V.MIO ( JKiVIM. IKHMKS 

\\ as-ume that tin s definition of synchronism is possible 
without involving any inconsistency, for any number of 
(points, therefore the following relations hold : 

1. If the clock at B be synchronous with the clock 
at A, then the clock at A is synchronous with the clock 
at B. 

:>. If the clock at A as well as the clock at B are 
both synchronous with the clock at C, then the clocks at 
A and B an- synchronous. 

Thus with the help of certain physical experiences, we 
have established what we understand when we speak of 
clocks at rest at different stations, and synchronous with 
one another ; and thereby we have arrived at a definition of 
synchronism and time. 

In accordance with experience we shall assume that the 
magnitude 

2 AB 



, where r is a universal constant. 



\\ "e have defined time essentially with a clock at rest 
in a stationary system. Ou account of its adaptability 
to the stationary system, we call the time defined in this 
way as, " time of the stationary system." 

$ 2. On the Relativity of Length and Time. 

The following reflections are based on the Principle 
of Kelatmt\ and on the Principle of Constancy of the 
velocity of light, both of which we define in the following 
way : 

1. The laws according tu which the uuture of physical 
>\>tmis alter are independent of the manner in which 
those flian^s ;, n . referred to two co-ordinate \stem> 



6 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

which have a uniform translatory motion relative to each 
other. 

2. Every ray of light moves in the " stationary 
co-ordinate system " with the same velocity c, the velocity 
being independent of the condition whether this my of 
light is emitted by a body at rest or in motion.* Therefore 

Path of Light 

velocity == = - , 

Interval or time 

where, by interval of time, we mean time as defined 
in 1. 

Let us have a rigid rod at rest ; this has a length /, 
when measured by a measuring rod at rest ; we suppose 
that the axis of the rod is laid along the X-axis of the 
system at rest, and then a uniform velocity >, parallel 
to the axis of X, is imparted to it. Let us now enquire 
about the length of the moving rod; this can be obtained 
by either of these operations. 

(a) The observer provided with the measuring rod 
moves along with the rod to be measured, and measures 
by direct superposition the length of the rod : just as if 
the observer, the measuring rod, and the rod to be measured 
were at rest. 

(6) The observer finds out, by means of clocks placed 
in a system at rest (the clocks being synchronous as defined 
in 1), the points of this system where the ends of the 
rod to be measured occm at a particular time f. The 
distance between these two points, measured .by the 
previously used measuring rod, this time it being at rest, 
is a length, which wt> may call the " length of the rod." 

According to the Principle of Relativity, the length 
found out by the operation ), which we mav call " the 

* Vide Note V. 



OX THE EI.FOTRODYXV.Mlrs OF MOVING HOUIKS / 

length of the roil in the moving >ystem " is equal to the 
length I of the rod in the stationary system. 

The length which is found out by the second method, 

mav he callo<l the ffnyth of Ike m<>i ir></ roil mounted from 

I he xf tlitn/irij xi/xft-m. This length i> to he estimated on 
the !>;isis of our principle, and <"V &h<i 1.1 find it /<> If different 
from (. 

In the generally recognised kinematics, we silently 

assume that the lengths defined by these two operations 

jiial, or in other words, that at an epoch of time (, 

a moving rigid body is geometrically replaceable by the 

s-imc body, which can replace it in the condition of rest. 

Eelativity of Time. 

Let us suppose that the two clocks synchronous with 
the clocks in the system at rest are brought to the ends A, 
and^B of a rod, /.<?., the time of the clocks correspond to 
the time <>f the stationary system at the points where they 
happen to arrive ; these clocks are therefore synchronous 
iti the stationary system. 

\Ve further imagine that there are two observers at the 
two watches, and moving with them, and that these 
observers apply the criterion for synchronism to the two 
clui k-. At the time t , a ray of light goes out from A, is 

rollected from B at the time t , and arrives back at A at 

B 

time / . Taking into consideration the principle of 
constancy of the velocity oi light, we have 



,, AB 

and t t= . 

A B c+v 



S PRIXOn LE OF RELATIVITY 

where / } is the length of the moving rod, meu-mv<i 
in the stationary system. Therefore the observers stationed 
with the watches will not find the clocks synchronous, 
though the observer in the stationary system must declare 
the docks to be synchronous, \Ve therefore sei that we can 
attach no absolute significance to the concept of synchro 
nism ; but two events which are synchronous when viewed 
from one system, will not be synchronous when viewed 
from a system moving relatively to this system. 



$ 3. Theory of Co-ordinate and Time-Transformation 

from a stationary system to a system which 

moves relatively to this with 

uniform velocity. 

Let there be given, in the stationary system two 
co-ordinate systems, I.e., two series of three mutually 
perpendicular lines issuing from a point. Let the X-axes 
of each coincide with one another, and the V and Z-axes 
be parallel. Let a rigid measuring rod, and a number 
of clocks be given to each of the systems, and let the rods 
and clocks in each be exactly alike each other. 

Let the initial point of one of the systems (/?) have 
a constant velocity in the direction t)f the X-axis of 
the other which is stationary system K, the motion being 
also communicated to the rods and clocks in the system (/). 
Any time t of the stationary system K corresponds to a 
definite position of the axes of the moving system, which 
are always parallel to the axes of the stationary system. By 
/, we always mean the time in the stationary system. 

We suppose that the space is measured by the stationary 
measuring rod placed in the stationary system, as well as 
by the moving measuring rod placed in the moving 



ON THE ILlOTHODYNAMIOa OK MOYl.M; BODIES 

system, and \ve thus obtain the co-ordinates (j ,y, z) for the 
stationary s\>tcm, and ($,rj,) for the moving system. Let 
the time t be determined for each point of the stationary 
system (which are provided with clocks) by means of the 
clocks which are placed in the stationary system, with 
the help of light-signals as described in 1. Let also 
the time T of the moving system be determined for each 
point of the moving system (in which there are clocks which 
are at rest relative to the moving system), by means of 
the method of light signals between these points (in 
which there are clocks) in the manner described in 1. 

To every value of (<,//, -, /) which fully determines 
the position and time of an event in the stationary system, 
there correspond-; a system of values (,r/,C T ) ; now the 
problem is to find out the system of equations connect 
ing these magnitudes. 

Primarily it is clear that on account of the property 
of homogeneity which we ascribe to time and space, the 
equations must be linea 1 . 

If we put .? := rf, then -it is clear that at a point 
relatively at rest in the system K, we have a system of 
values (.< y z] which are independent of time. Now 
let us find out T as a function of ( ,y,z,(}. For this 
purpose we have to express in equations the fact that T is 
not other than the time given by the clocks which are 
at rest in the system k which must be made synchron 
ous in the manner described in I. 

Let a ray of light be sent at time T O from the origin 
of the system k along the X-axis towards .c and let it be 
reflected from that place at time r l towards the origin 
of moving co-ordinates and let it arrive there at time T 2 
then we must have 

+ T,)=T 1 



10 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

If we now introduce the condition that T is a function 
of co-orrdinates, and apply the principle of constancy of 
the velocity of light in the stationary system, we have 

| JT (0, 0, 0, 0+T 0, 0, 0, {t+ ^.+^L- } \ 1 

( c v c + v ) / J 

=T(* , o, o, t + I 
C V ). 

It is to be noticed that instead of the origin of co 
ordinates, we could select some other point as the exit 
point for rays of light, and therefore the above equation 
holds for all values of {^y,z,t,}, 

A similar conception, being applied to they- and r-axis 
gives us, when we take into consideration the fact that 
light when viewed from the stationary system, is alnays 
propogated along those axes with the velocity ^/c* v*, 
we have the questions 



From these equations it follows that T is a linear func 
tion of . and t. From equations (1) we obtain 






where a is an unknown function of v. 

With the help of these results it is easy to obtain the 
magnitudes (,i?,)> tf we express by means of equations 
the fact that light, when measured in the moving system 
is always propagated with the constant velocity c (as 
the principle of constancy of light velocity in conjunc 
tion with the principle of relativity requires). For a 



ON THE ELECTRODYNAMICS OF MOVING BODIES 11 

time T=O, if the ray is sent in the direction of increasing 
, we have 



Now the ray of light moves relative to the origin of Jc 
with a velocity c r, measured in the stationary system ; 
therefore we have 



Substituting these values of t in the equation for , 
we obtain 



In an analogous manner, we obtain by considering the 
ray of light which moves along the ^-axis, 



where - y , 



c ., c 

If for .</, we substitute its value x tv, we obtain 

/ v.i- \ 
V c* / 

t=4> (). /8 (*-), 



where ff= . t , and < (f)= =r-!=r^ = is a function 
vi v* Vc*v* P 

^ 
of v. 



12 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

/ 

If we make no assumption about the initial position 
of tlu- moving system and about the null-point of t t 
then an additive constant is to be added to the right 
hand side. 

We have now to show, that every ray of light moves 
in the moving system with a velocity c (when measured in 
the moving system), in case, as we have actually assumed, 
c is also the velocity in the stationary system ; for we have 
not as yet adduced any proof in support of the assump 
tion that the principle of relativity is reconcilable with the 
principle of constant light-velocity. 

Atatimer = / = o let a spherical wave be sent out 

from the common origin of the two systems of co-ordinates, 

and let it spread with a velocity c in the system K. If 

(> } >/> *)> De a point reached by the wave, we have 

a .2 +2/ 2 + ._ C 2^ > 

with the aid of our transformation-equations, let us 
transform this equation, and we obtain by a simple 

calculation, 

2 +77 2 + 2 =c z T s . 

Therefore the wave is propagated in the moving system 
with the same velocity c, and as a spherical wave.* Therefore 
we show that the two principles are mutually reconcilable. 

In the transformations we have go: an undetermined 
function <j> (v), and wo now proceed to find it out. 

Let us introduce for this purpose a third co-ordinate 
system k 1 , which is set in motion relative to the system X-, 
the motion being parallel to the -axis. Let the velocity of 
the origin be ( r). At the time t = o, all the initial 
co-ordinate points coincide, and for f = ,< =y = z = n, the 
time t of the system k = o. We shall say that (./ y ; / ) 
are the co-ordinates measured in the system k , then by a 
* Vide Note 9. 



ON THE ELECTRODYNAMICS OF MOVING BODIES 13 

two-fold application of the transformation-equations, we 
obtain 



-v>, etc. 



Since the relations between (/, y , z , t }, and (x, y, z, t) 
do not contain time explicitly, therefore K and k are 
relatively at rest. 

It appears that the systems K and k are identical. 



Let us now turn our attention to the part of the y-axis 
between ( = 0, 77 = 0, = o), and (=o, >/ = ], =0). Let 
this piece of the y-axis be covered with a rod moving with 
the velocity v relative to the system K and perpendicular 
to its axis ; the ends of the rod having therefore the 
co-ordinates 



Therefore the length of the rod measured in the system 
K is ~T7~y For the system moving with velocity ( ? ), 
we have on grounds of symmetry, 
Z Z 



14 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

4. The physical significance of the equations 

obtained concerning moving rigid 

bodies and moving clocks. 

Let us consider a rigid sphere (i.e., one having a 
spherical figure when tested in the stationary system) of 
radius R which is at rest relative to the system (K), and 
whose centre coincides with the origin of K then the equa 
tion of the surface of this sphere, which is moving with a 
velocity v relative to K, is 



At time t o, the equation is expressed by means of 




A rigid body which has the_figure of a sphere when 
measured in the moving system, has therefore in the 
moving condition when considered from the stationary 
system, the figure of a rotational ellipsoid with semi-axes 



Therefore the y and z dimensions of the sphere (there 
fore of any figure also) do not appear to be modified by the 
motion, but the x dimension is shortened in the ratio 



1: V 1 ; the shortening is the larger, the larger 

is v. For v = c, all moving bodies, when considered from 
a stationary system shrink into planes. For a velocity 
larger than the velocity of light, our propositions become 



ON THE ELECTRODYNAMICS OK MOVING BODIES 15 

meaningless ; in our theory c plays the part of infinite 
velocity. 

It is clear that similar results hold about stationary 
bodies in a stationary system when considered from a 
uniformly moving system. 

Let us now consider that a clock which is lying at rest 
in the stationary system gives the time f, and lying 
at rest relative to the moving system is capable of giving 
the time r ; suppose it to be placed at the origin of the 
moving system X-, and to be so arranged that it gives the 
time T. How much does the clock gain, when viewed from 
the stationary system K ? We have, 



V I- 



| t 7i \, 



7i \, and x=vt, 



Therefore the clock loses by an amount ^"2 P er second 

of motion, to the second order of approximation. 

From this, the following peculiar consequence follows. 
Suppose at two points A and B of the stationary system 
two clocks are given which are synchronous in the sense 
explained in 3 when viewed from the stationary system. 
Suppose the clock at A to be set in motion in the line 
joining it with B, then after the arrival of the clock at B, 
they will no longer be found synchronous, but the clock 
which was set in motion from A will lag behind the clock 

p 1 
which had been all along at B by an amount $t -$, where 

t is the time required for the journey. 



16 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

We see forthwith that the result holds also when the 
clock moves from A to B by a polygonal line, and also 
when A and B coincide. 

If we assume that the result obtained for a polygonal 
line holds also for a curved line, we obtain the following 
law. If at A, there be two synchronous clocks, and if we 
set in motion one of them with a constant velocity along a 
closed curve till it comes back to A, the journey being 
completed in / -seconds, then after arrival, the last men- 

01 

tioned clock will be behind the stationary one by \t ~ 

seconds. From this, we conclude that a clock placed at 
the equator must be slower by a very small amount than a 
similarly constructed clock which is placed at the pole, all 
other conditions being identical. 



5. Addition-Theorem of Velocities. 

Let a point move in the system k (which moves with 
velocity v along the ;r-axis of the system K) according to 
the equation 

= Y 1? = M ,T, = 0, 

where t/ | and w are constants. 

It is required to find out the motion of the point 
relative to the system K. If we now introduce the system 
of equations in 3 in the equation of motion of the point, 
we obtain 



w f + v \ c / "" 
;= 1 t, y 



ON THE ELECTRODYNAMICS OF Mo VI. Mi I .ODIES 17 

The law of parallelogram of velocities hold up to the 
first order of approximation. We can put 



1C 

and u = tan" 1 



i.e., a is put equal to the angle between the velocities v, 
and w. Then we have 



u= 



r/ o \ / vw sin a \ "1 : 
[( + /<+ 2 vw cos a) I j 



, //( cos -i 

., 



It should be noticed that r- and w outer into the 
expression for velocity symmetrically. If iv has the direction 
of the v-axis of the moving system, 

TT f+" 



From this equation, \ve see that by combining two 
velocities, each of which is smaller than c, we ojbtain a 
velocity which is always smaller than <. If we put v=c %, 
and w=c\, where x and A. are each smaller than c, 



It is also clear that the velocity of light c cannot be 
altered by adding to it a velocity smaller than c. For (his 
case, 



Fufo Note 12. 



18 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

We have obtained the formula for U for the case when 
v and w have the same direction, it can also be obtained 
by combining two transformations according to section 
3. If in addition to the systems K, and k, we intro 
duce the system k , of which the initial point moves 
parallel to the -axis with velocity w, then between the 
magnitudes, x, y, z, t and the corresponding magnitudes 
of k , we obtain a system of equations, which differ from 
the equations in 3, only in the respect that in place of 
r, we shall have to write, 



We see that such a parallel transformation forms a 
group. 

Wo have deduced the kinematics corresponding to our 
two fundamental principles for the laws necessary for us, 
and we shall now pass over to their application in electro 
dynamics. 

*II. ELECTKODYNAMICAL PART. 

6. Transformation of Maxwell s equations for 
Pure Vacuum. 

On the nature of lite Electromotive Force caused by motion 
in a magnetic field. 

The Maxwell-Hertz equations for pure vacuum may 
hold for the stationary system K, so that 



- -?- [X, Y, /] = 



9 JL 

9< dy 



M N 



ON THE KLE( THODVXA.Mli s oi .\[()VlN(i BODIES 



and 



i a 



a a j 

3- 6y 3 
X Y Z 



.- (1) 



where [X, Y, Z] are the components of the electric 
force, L, M, N are the components of the magnetic force. 

If we apply the transformations in 3 to these equa 
tions, and if we refer the electromagnetic processes to the 
co-ordinate system moving with velocity r, we obtain, 



[X, 



- - N), 



and 



a 
al 



X /8(Y- ? N) j8(Z+ -M) 

c < 



The principle of Relativity requires that the Maxwell- 
Hertzian equations for pure vacuum shall hold also for the 
system k, if they hold for he system K, i.e., for the 
vectors of the electric and magnetic forces acting upon 
electric and magnetic masses in the moving system k, 



PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 



which are defined by their pondermotive reaction, the same 
equations hold, . . . i.e. . . . 



1 J (X , Y , Z ) = 
c o T 



a. 6 _a 

6f di) 3 
L M N 



a 

9* 



y 



... (3) 



Clearly both the systems of equations (2) and (3) 
developed for the system k shall express the same things, 
for both of these systems are equivalent to the Maxwell- 
Hertzian equations for the system K. Since both the 
systems of equations (2) and (3) agree up to the symbols 
representing the vectors, it follows that the functions 
occurring at corresponding places will agree up to a certain 
factor $ (v), which depends only on v, and is independent of 
( V> > T ) Hence the relations, 

[X , Y , Z ]=V (r) [X, ft (Y- ?X), ft (Z+ ^M)], 



[L , M , N ]=* (r) [L, /i (M + ?Z;, (X- Y)]. 

Then by reasoning similar to that followed in (3), 
it can be shown that ^(r) = l. 

.-. [X , Y , Z ] = [X, ft (Y- f N), j8 (/+ ; M )j 



[ L . W. N ] = [L, 



.^Z), (N-- r Y)]. 



ON THE ELECTRODYNAMICS OF MOVING BODIES 21 

For the interpretation of these equations, we make the 
following remarks. Let us have a point-mass of electricity 
which is of magnitude unity in the stationary system K, 
i.e., it exerts a unit force upon a similar quantity placed at 
a distance of 1 cm. If this quantity of electricity be at 
rest in the stationary system, then the force acting upon it 
is equivalent to the vector (X, V, Z) of electric force. But 
if the quantity of electricity be at rest relative to the 
moving system (at least for the moment considered), then 
the force acting upon it, and measured in the moving 
system is equivalent to the vector (X , Y , Z ). The first 
three of equations (1), (2), (3), can be expressed in the 
following way : 

1. If a point-mass of electric unit pole moves in an 
electro-magnetic field, then besides the electric force, an 
electromotive force acts upon it, which, neglecting the 
numbers involving the second and higher powers of v/c, 
is equivalent to the vector-product of the velocity vector, 
and the magnetic force divided by the velocity of light 
(Old mode of expression). 

2. If a point-mass of electric unit pole moves in 
an electro-magnetic field, then the force acting upon it is 
equivalent to the electric force existing at the position of 
the unit pole, which we obtain by the transformation of 
the field to a co-ordinate system which is at rest relative 
to the electric unit pole [New mode of expression]. 

Similar theorems hold with reference to the magnetic 
force. We st-e that in the theory developed the electro 
magnetic force plays the psirt of an auxiliary concept, 
which owes its introduction in theory to the circumstance 
that the electric and magnetic forces possess no existence 
independent of the nature of motion of the co-ordinate 
system. 



22 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

It is further clear that the assymetry mentioned in the 
introduction which occurs when we treat of the current 
excited by the relative motion of a magnet and a con 
ductor disappears. Also the question about the seat of 
electromagnetic energy is seen to be without any meaning. 

7. Theory of Doppler s Principle and Aberration. 

In the system K, at a great distance from the origin of 
co-ordinates, let there be a source of electrodynamic waves, 
which is represented with sufficient approximation in a part 
of space not containing the origin, by the equations : 



I 

Z = Z sin * J N=N sin * } 

Here (X , Y , Z ) and (L , M , N ) are the vectors 
which determine the amplitudes of the train of waves, 
(I, m, n] are the direction-cosines of the wave-normal. 

Let us now ask ourselves about the composition of 
these waves, when they are investigated by an observer at 
rest in a moving medium A : By applying the equations of 
transformation obtained in 6 for the electric and magnetic 
forces, and the equations of transformation obtained in 3 
for the co-ordinates, and time, we obtain immediately : 

L/=L n sin* 



ON THE ELECTRODYNAMICS OF MOVING BODIES 



where 



, n = 



1- 



From the equation for w it follows : If an observer moves 
with the velocity r relative to an infinitely distant source 
of light emitting waves of frequency v, in such a manner 
that the line joining the source of light and the observer 
makes an angle of 4> with the velocity of the observer 
referred to a system of co-ordinates which is stationary 
with regard to the source, then the frequency v which 
is perceived by the observer is represented by the formula 




\ 



This is Doppler s principle for any velocity. 
then the equation takes the simple form 



If 4>= 



1 + 



We see that contrary to the usual conception v=oo, 
for v = c. 

If $ =angle between the wave-normal (direction of the 
ray) in the moving system, and the line of motion of the 
observer, the equation for / takes the form 



1 - cos 4> 
e 



24 PRINCIPLE OK RELATIVITY 

This equation expresses the law of observation in its 
most gen eral form. If <=-, the equation takes the 
simple form 



We have still to investigate the amplitude of the 
waves, which occur in these equations. If A and A be 
the amplitudes in the stationary and the moving systems 
(either electrical or magnetic), we have 



(1 cos 4> I 
c ) 



If 4>=o, this reduces to the simple form 



A 8 =A 



From these equations, it appears that for an observer, 
which moves with the velocity c towards the source of 
light, the source should appear infinitely intense. 

8. Transformation of the Energy of the Bays of 

Light. Theory of the Radiation-pressure 

on a perfect mirror. 

Since is equal to the energy of light per unit 

07T 

volume, we have to regard J as the energy of light in 



ON THE ELECTRODYNAMICS OF MOVING BODIES 25 

A * 

the moving system. _ would therefore denote the 
A. 

ratio between the energies of a definite light-complex 
"measured when moving" and "measured when stationary/ 
the volumes of the light-complex measured in K and k 
being equal. Yet this is not the case. If /, m, u are the 
direction-cosines of the wave-normal of light in the 
stationary system, then no energy passes through the 
surface elements of the spherical surface 



(.1- 



which expands with the velocity oi light. We can therefore 
say, that this surface always encloses the same light-complex. 
Let us now consider the quantity of energy, which this 
surface encloses, when regarded from the svstem k, i.e., 
the energy of the light-complex relative to the svstem 
A-. 

Regarded from the moving system, the spherical 
surface becomes an ellipsoidal surface, having, at the time 
r = 0, the equation : 



If S= volume of the sphere, S = volume of this 
ellipsoid, then a simple calculation shows that : 



S ft 

s " 



- OOS <t> 



If E denotes the quantity of light energy measured in 
the stationary system, E the quantity measured in the 
4 



26 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

moving system, which are enclosed by the surfaces 
mentioned above, then 




E A 2 Q Vl-v*/c* 

8^ S 

If 4>=0, we have the simple formula : 



It is to be noticed that the energy and the frequency 
of a light-complex vary according to the same law with 
the state of motion of the observer. 

Let there be a perfectly reflecting mirror at the co-or 
dinate-plane =0, from which the plane-wave considered 
in the last paragraph is reflected. Let us now ask ourselves 
about the light-pressure exerted on the reflecting surface 
and the direction, frequency, intensity of the light after 
reflexion. 

Let the incident light be defined by the magnitudes 
A cos $, r (referred to the system K). Regarded from A-, 
we have the corresponding magnitudes : 

i v 

1 cos 4> 

A = A 



cos 4> 1 
cos <*> = 



v = v 

, 

~c~ 



ON TKE KLECTKOUYNAMUS ()! MOV1N(; BODIES 27 

For the reflected light we obtain, when the process 
is referred to the system k : 

A =A , cos <$" = cos < , v" = v . 

By means of a back-transformation to the stationary 
system, we obtain K, for the rellected light : 



A" = A" - =A 

/ 1 v * 

V l ~^ 



COS <t> 



Cos4 >" + (1+ - 

,_ _ c_ __ \ c 

" 



1+ ^ cos $" 1 2 r cos < + "* 

" C 

(H) 



/ =/ =!/ 



The amount or energy falling upon the unit surface 
of the mirror per unit of time (measured in the stationary 

system) is . The amount of energy going 

87r(c cos < ) 

away from unit surface of the mirror per unit of time is 
A ""/8w ( c cos <I>"+r). The difference of these two 
expressions is, according to the Energy principle, the 
amount of work exerted, by the pressure of light ]>er unit 
of time. If we put this eijiial to P.r, where P= pressure 
of light, we have 



(cos * - | 
,,_., Aa V _/ 



1- 



28 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

As a first approximation, we obtain 

P=-2 - <*>* 4>. 
8 

which is in accordance with facts, and with other 
theories. 

All problems of optics of moving bodies can be solved 
after the method used here. The essential point is, that 
the electric and magnetic forces of light, which are 
influenced by a moving body, should be transformed to a 
system of co-ordinates which is stationary relative to the 
body. In this way, every problem of the optics of moving 
bodies would be reduced to a series of problems of the 
optics of stationary bodies. 



9. Transformation of the Maxwell-Hertz Equations. 
Let us start from the equations : 

M 1 1 ?>L r>Y ft 7 1 



, 

" 



dt 



I/ _i.9 Y \ -91 -9-? iaM_8Z_ax 

c \ pu * dt) ~ d= a.<- r c a^ a. 1 a- 



l( 4-9j?\ = 9^ I _9J J 
c \ pu> dt ) Q.e dy 



_ 
c ~dt "a.- 



_ 

Qy 6 



where = 






oy 



, denotes TT times the density 



of electricity, and (?t,, ?, tt r ) are the velocity-components 
of electricity. If we now suppose that the electrical- 
masses are bound unchangeably to small, rigid bodies 



UN THK KLLCTKODVNAMKS OF MUVINC BODIES 29 

(Ion*, electrons), then these equations form the electromag 
netic basis of Lorentz s electrodynamics and optics for 
moving bodies. 

If these equations which hold in the system K, are 
transformed to the system /, with the aid of the transfor 
mation-equations given in -3 and (5, then we obtain 
the equations : 



1 f , 

C I P 



_ ___ 

67? 9 dr 8* 67; 



9Z. l = 

Qr J 



* T 8r J- 87 dr, 

where 



- - 



Since the vector (/^ // x ) is nothing but the 
> T? > 4 

velocity of the electrical mass measured in the system A-, 
as can be easily seen from the addition-theorem of 
velocities in \ so it is hereby shown, that by taking 



30 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

our kineinatical principle as the basis, the electromagnetic 
basis of Loreutz s theory of electrodynamics of moving 
bodies correspond to the relativity-postulate. It can be 
briefly remarked here that the following important law 
follows easily from the equations developed in the present 
section : if an electrically charged body moves in any 
manner in space, and if its charge does not change thereby, 
when regarded from a system moving along with it, then 
the charge remains constant even when it is regarded from 
the stationary system K. 



10. Dynamics of the Electron (slowly accelerated). 

Let us suppose that a point-shaped particle, having 
the electrical charge e (to be called henceforth the electron) 
moves in the electromagnetic field ; we assume the 
following about its law of motion. 

If the electron be at rest at any definite epoch, then 
in the next "particle of time," the motion takes place 
according to the equations 



n d*i = w * = z rf<- = 

Where (a-, y, .?) are the co-ordinates of the electron, and 
m is its mass. 

Let the electron possess the velocity v at a certain 
epoch of time. Let us now investigate the laws according 
to which the electron will move in the particle of time 
immediately following this epoch. 

Without influencing the generality of treatment, we can 
and we will assume that, at the moment we are considering, 



ON THK ELECTRODYNAMICS OF MOVING BODIES 31 

the electron is at the origin of co-ordinates, and moves 
with the velocity v along the X-axis of the system. It is 
clear that at this moment (^=0) the electron is at rest 
relative to the system A, which moves parallel to the X-axis 
with the constant velocity r. 

From the suppositions made above, in combination 

with the principle of relativity, it is clear that regarded 

from the system k, the electron moves according to the 
equations 



dr* 



in the time immediately following the moment, where the 
symliols (, rj, , T, X , Y , Z ) refer to the system A\ If we 
now fix, that for t .v=y-z=(\ T=g = i) = =Q, then the 
equations of transformation ^iven in { (and (5) hold, and we 
have : 



With the aid of these equations, we can transform the 
above equations of motion from the system A- to the system 
K, and obtain : 



Z 8 ,- _ <_ 1 y d*y e_ I ( y _ r 
<// vn J5 (//" ,n f 



(A) 



32 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

Let us now consider, following the usual method of 
treatment, the longitudinal and transversal mass of a 
moving electron. We write the equations (A) in the form 

" =eX=eX 



? M] = 



and let us" first remark, that <?X , eY , ?Z are the com 
ponents of the ponderomotive force acting upon the 
electron, and are considered in a moving system which, at 
this moment, moves with a velocity which is equal to that 
of the electron. This force can, for example, be measured 
by means of a spring-balance which is at rest in this last 
system. If we briefly call this force as "the force acting 
upon the electron," and maintain the equation : 

Mass-number x aeceleration-number=force-number, and 
if we further fix that the accelerations are measured in 
the stationary system K, then from the above equations, 
we obtain : 

Longitudinal 



Transversal mass = 



Naturally, when other definitions are given of the force 
and the acceleration, other numbers are obtained f^r the 



* Vide Note 21. 



o.N THK ELECTRODYNAMICS or MOVING BODIES 33 

mass ; hence we see that we must proceed very carefully 
in comparing the different theories of the motion of the 
electron. 

\Ve remark that this result about the mass hold also 
for ponderable material mass ; for in our sense, a ponder* 
able material point may be made into an electron by the 
addition of an electrical charge which may be as small as 
possible. 

Let us now determine the kinetic energy of the 
electron. It the electron moves from the origin of co-or 
dinates of the system K with the initial velocity steadily 
along the X-axis under the action of an electromotive 
force X, then it is clear that the energy drawn from the 
electrostatic field has the value /<?X^--. Since the electron 
is only slowly accelerated, and in consequence, no energy 
is given out in the form of radiation, therefore the energy 
drawn from the electro-static field may be put equal to 
the energy W of motion. Considering the whole process of 
motion in questions, the iirst of equations A) holds, we 
obtain : 




For v = c, *\\ is infinite!] great. A> our former result 
shows, vel iritir.- > \<vco!iiig that of light can have no 
possibility of existent 

In consequence of the arguments mentioned above, 
this expression for kinetic energy must also hold for 

ponderable masse*. 

\Ye can now enumerate the characteristics of the 

motion of the electron H\,ulaMe for experimental verifica 
tion, which follow from equations A). 



34 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

1. From the second of equations A) ; it follows that 
an electrical force Y, and a magnetic force N produce 
equal deflexions of an electron moving with the velocity 

v, when Y= _^ . Therefore we see that according to 

our theory, it is possible to obtain the velocity of an 
electron from the ratio of the magnetic deflexion A m , and 
the electric deflexion A,, by applying the law : 

A. t> 
A, c 

This relation can be tested by means of experiments 

because the velocity of the electron can be directly 

measured by means of rapidly oscillating electric and 
magnetic fields. 

2. v From the value which is deduced for the kinetic 
energy of the electron, it follows that when the electron 
falls through a potential difference of P, the velocity v 
which is acquired is given by the following relation : 

p=( xd<;=c 2 r l -ii . 

J L0-? J 

8. We calculate the radius of curvature R of the 
path, where the only deflecting force is a magnetic force N 
acting perpendicular to the velocity of projection. From 
the second of equations A) we obtain : 

_d*y ^ ^ r K 

< R ,. c , 

H= ""^ 

. \ 

These three relations are complete expressions for the 
law of motion of the electron according to the above 
theory. 



ALBRECHT EINSTEIN 

[y/ s/turf l>iot/i-a/j//i< <it t/o/e.] 

The name of Prof. Albrecht Einstein has now spread far 
beyond the narrow pale of scientific investigators owing to 
the brilliant confirmation of his predicted deflection of 
light-rays by the gravitational field of the sun during the 
total solar eclipse of May 29, 1919. But to the serious / 
student of science, he has been known from the beginning 
of the current century, and many dark problems in physics 
has been illuminated with the lustre of his genius, before, 
owing to the latest sensation just mentioned, he Hashes out 
before public imagination as a scientific star of the first 
magnitude. 

Einstein is a Swiss-German of Jewish extraction, and 
began his scientific career as a privat-dozent in the Swiss 
University of Zurich about the year 1902. Later on, he 
migrated to the German University of Prague in Bohemia / 
as ausser-ordentliche (or associate) Professor. In 19! 4, * 
through the exertions of Prof. M. Planck of the Berlin 
University, he was appointed a paid member of the Hoyal 
(now National) Prussian Academy of Sciences, on a 
salary of 18,000 marks per year. In this post, he has 
only to do and guide research work. Another distinguished 
occupant of the same post was Yan t ilofY, the eminent 
physical chemist. 

It is rather difficult to give a detailed, and consistent 
chronological account of his scientific activities, they are 
so variegated, and cover such a wide field. The first work 
which gained him distinction was an investigation on 
Brownian Movement. An admirable account will be found 
in Perrin s book The Atoms. Starting from Boltzmann s 



86 PRINCIPLE OP RELATIVITY 

theorem connecting the entropy, and the probability of a 
state, he deduced a formula on the mean displacement of 
small particles (colloidal) suspended in a liquid. This 
formula gives us one of the best methods for finding out a 
very fundamental number in physics namely the number 
of molecules in one gm. molecule of gas (Avogadro s 
number). The formula was shortly afterwards verified by 
Perrin, Prof, of Chemical Physics in the Sorbonne, Paris. 

To Einstein is also due the resusciation of Planck s 
quantum theory of energy-emission. This theory has not 
yet caught the popular imagination to the same extent as 
the new theory of Time, and Space, but it is none the less 
iconoclastic in its scope as far as classical concepts are 
concerned. It was known for a long time that the 
observed emission of light from a heated black body did 
not correspond to the formula which could be deduced from 
the older classical theories of continuous emission and 
propagation. In the year 1900, Prof\ Planck of the Berlin 
University worked out a formula which was based on the 
bold assumption that energy was emitted and absorbed by 
the molecules in multiples of the quantity hv, where // 
is a constant (which is universal like the constant of 
gravitation), and v is the frequency of the light. 

The conception was so radically different from all 
accepted theories that in spite of the great success of 
Planck s radiation formula in explaining the observed facts 
of black-body radiation, it did not meet with much favour 
from the physicists. In fact, some one remarked jocularly 
that according to Planck, energy flies out of a radiator like 
a swarm of gnats. 

But Einstein found a support for the new-born concept 
in another direction. It was known that if green or ultraviolet 
light was allowed to fall on a plate of some alkali metal, 
the plate lost electrons. The electrons were emitted with 



ALBERT EINSTEIN 37 

all velocities, but there is generally a maximum limit. 
From the investigations of Lenard and Ladenburg, the 
curious discovery was made that this maximum velocity of 
emission did not at all depend upon the intensity of light, 
but upon its wavelength. The more violet was the light, 
the greater was the velocity of emission. 

To account for this fact, Einstein made the bold 
assumption that the light is propogated in space as a unit 
pulse (he calls it a Light-cell), and falling upon an 
individual atom, liberates electrons according to the energy 
equation 

liv=- -ftnv^ + A, 

where (in, r) are the mass and velocity of the electron. 
A is a constant characteristic of the metal plate. 

There was little material for the confirmation of this 
law when it was first proposed (1905), and eleven years 
elapsed before Prof. Millikan established, by a set of 
experiments scarcely rivalled for the ingenuity, skill, and 
care displayed, the absolute truth of the law. As results of 
this confirmation, and other brilliant triumphs, the quantum 
law is now regarded as a fundamental law of Energetics. 
In recent years, X rays have been added to the domain of 
light, and in this direction also, Einstein s photo-electric 
formula has proved to be one of the most fruitful 
conceptions in Physics. 

The quantum law was next extended by Einstein to the 
problems of decrease of specific heat at low temperature, 
and here also his theory was confirmed in a brilliant 
manner. 

We pass over his other contributions to the equation of 
state, to the problems of null-point energy, and photo 
chemical reactions. The recent experimental works of 



88 , PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

Nernst and Warburg seem to indicate that through 
Einstein s genius, we are probably for the first time having 
a satisfactory theory of photo-chemical action. 

In 191."), Einstein made an excursion into Experimental 
Physics, and here also, in his characteristic way, he tackled 
one of the most fundamental concepts of Physics. It is 
well-known that according- to Ampere, the magnetisation 
of iron and iron-like bodies, when placed within a coil 
carrying an electric current is due to the excitation in the 
metal of small electrical circuits. But the conception 
though a very fruitful one, long remained without a trace 
of experimental proof, though after the discovery of the 
electron, it was generally believed that these molecular 
currents may be due to the rotational motion of free 
electrons within the metal. It is easily seen that if in the 
process of magnetisation, a number of electrons be set into 
rotatory motion, then these will impart to the metal itself 
a turning couple. The experiment is a rather difficult one, 
and many physicists tried in vain to observe the effect. 
But in collaboration with de Haas, Einstein planned and 
successfully carried out this experiment, and proved the 
essential correctness of Ampere s views. 

Einstein s studies on Relativity were commenced in the 
year 1905, and has been continued up to the present time. 
The first paper in the present collection forms Einstein s 
first great contribution to the Principle of Special 
Relativity. We have recounted in the introduction how out 
of the chaos and disorder into which the electrodynamics 
and optics of moving bodies had fallen previous to 1895, 
Lorentz, Einstein and Minkowski have succeeded in 
building up a consistent, and fruitful new theory of Time 
and Space. 

But Einstein was not satisfied with the study of the 
special problem of Relativity for uniform motion, but 



ALBERT EINSTEIN 



tried, in a series of papers beginiiin^ from 1011, to extend 
it to the case of non-uniform motion. The last paper in 
the present collection is a translation of a comprehensive 
article which he contributed to the Annalen der Physik in 
1916 on this subject, and gives, in his own words, the 
Principles of Generalized Relativity. The triumphs of 
this theory are now matters of public knowledge. 

Einstein is now only -45, and it is to be hoped that 
science will continue to be enriched, for a long time to 
come, with further achievements of his genius. 



INTRODUCTION. 

A* the present time, different opinions are being held 
about the fundamental equations of Electro-dynamics for 
moving bodies. The Hertzian 1 forms must be given up, 
for it has appeared that they are contrary to many experi 
mental results. 

In 1895 H. A. Lorentz- published his theory of optical 
and electrical phenomena in moving bodies; this theory 
uas based upon the atomistic conception (vorstellung) of 
electricity, and on account of its great success appears to 
have justified the bold hypotheses, by which it has been 
ushered into existence. In his theory, Lorentz proceeds 
from certain equations, which must hold at every point of 
"Ather"; then by forming the average values over " Phy 
sically infinitely small " regions, which however contain 
large numbers of electrons, the equations for electro-mag 
netic processes in moving bodies can be successfully built 
up. 

In particular, Lorentz s theory gives a gobd account of 
the non-exietence of relative motion of the earth and the 
lumiiiiferous " Ather ; it shows that this fact is intimately 
connected with the covarianee of the original equations 
when certain simultaneous transformations of the space and 
time co-ordinates are effected; these transformations have 
therefore obtained from II. l iueare ; the name of Lbrentz- 
transformations. The covarjance of the-e fundamental 

equations, when subjected to the Lomit/-traiisfunnation 
is a purely mathematical fart i.e. not based on any physi- 
cal considerations; 1 will call this the Theorem of Rela 
tivity ; this theorem re-t> essentially on the form of the 

1 n,i. No* l. - Note _ . 3 Vide Nute ::. 



I KIXCIPT.E OF RELATIVITY 

differential equations for the propagation of waves with 
the velocity of light. 

Now without recognising any hypothesis about the con 
nection between " Ather " and matter, we can expect these 
mathematically evident theorems to have their consequences 
so far extended that thereby even those laws of ponder 
able media which are yet unknown may anyhow possess 
this covariance when subjected to a Lorentz-transformation ; 
by saying this, we do not indeed express an opinion, but 
rather a conviction, and this conviction I may be permit 
ted to call the Postulate of Relativity. The position of 
affairs here is almost the same as when the Principle of 
Conservation of Energy was poslutated in cases, where the 
corresponding forms of energy were unknown. 

Now if hereafter, we succeed in maintaining this 
covariance as a definite connection between pure and simple 
observable phenomena in moving bodies, the definite con 
nection may be styled the Principle of Relativity. 

These differentiations seem to me to be necessary for 
enabling us to characterise the present day position of the 
electro-dynamics for moving bodies. 

H. A. Lorentz 1 has found out the" Relativity theorem" 
and has created the Relativity-postulate as a hypothesis 
that electrons and matter suffer contractions in consequence 
of their motion according to a certain law. 

A. Einstein 2 has brought out the point very clearly, 
that this postulate is not an artificial hypothesis but is 
rather a new way of comprehending the time-concept 
which is forced upon us by observation of natural pheno 
mena. 

The Principle of Relativity has not yet been formu 
lated for electro-dynamics of moving bodies in the sense 

i FcieNote4, * Note 6. 



IVTKODUCTION 3 

characterized by me. "In the present essay, while formu 
lating this principle, I shall obtain the fundamental equa- 
\\\\< for moving bodies in a sense which is uniquely deter 
mined by this principle. 

But it will be shown that none of the forms hitherto 
assumed for these equations can exactly fit in with this 
principle.* 

We would at first expect that the fundamental equa 
tions which are assumed by Lorentz for moving bodies 
would correspond to the Relativity Principle. But it will 
be shown that this is not the case for the general equations 
which Lorentz has for any possible, and also for magnetic 
bodies ; but this is approximately the case (if neglect the 
square of the velocity of matter in comparison to the 
velocity of light) for those equations which Lorentz here 
after infers for non-magnetic bodies. But this latter 
accordance with the Relativity Principle is due to the fact 
that the condition of non-magnetisation has been formula 
ted in a way not corresponding to the Relativity Principle; 
therefore the accordance is due to the fortuitous compensa 
tion of two contradictions to the Relalivity-Postulate. 
But meanwhile enunciation of the Principle in a rigid 
manner does not signify any contradiction to the hypotheses 
of Lorentz s molecular theory, but it shall become clear that 
the assumption of the contraction of the electron in 
Lorentz s theory must be introduced at an earlier stage 
than Lorentz has actually dene. 

In an appendix, I have gone into discussion of the 
position of Classical Mechanics with respect to the 
Relativity Postulate. Any easily perceivable modification 
of mechanics for satisfying the requirements of the 
Relativity theory would hardly afford any noticeable 
difference in observable processes ; but would lead to very 

* See notes on 8 aud 10. 



4 I lUN Oll LK OK RELATIVITY 

. 

surprising consequences. By laying down tin 1 Relativity- 
Postulate from the outset, sufficient means have been 
created for deducing henceforth the complete series of 
Laws of Mechanics from the principle of conservation of 
Energy alone (the form of the Energy being given in 
explicit foiras). -,. + 

NOTATIONS. 

Let a rectangular system (s, //, ~, /,) of reference be 
given in space and time. The unit of time shall be chosen 
in such a manner with reference to the nnit of length that 
the velocity of light in space becomes unity. 

Although I would prefer not to change the notations 
used by Lorent/, it appears important to me to use a 
different selection of symbols, for thereby certain homo 
geneity will appear from the very beginning. I shall 
denote the vector electric force by E, the magnetic 
induction by M, the electric induction by c and the 
magnetic force bv MI, so that (E, M, e, ;#) are used instead 
of Lorentz s (E, B, D, H) respectively. 

I shall further make use of complex magnitudes in a 
way which is not yet current in physical investigations, 
? . ., instead of operating with (/), I shall operate with (/ /), 
where /denotes \/-*-\. If now instead of (./, //, z, it), I 
use the method of writing with indices, certain essential 
circumstances will come into evidence ; on this will be 
based a general use of the suffixss (1, 2, 3, 1). The 
advantage of this method will be, as I expressly emphasize 
here, tha^ we shall have to handle symbols which have 
apparently a purely real appearance ; we can however at 
any moment pass to real equations if it is understood that 
of thr symlbols with indices, such ones as have the suffix 
4 only once, denote imaginary quantities, while those 



S OTATIOXS O 

which have not at all the suffix 4, or have it twice denote 
real quantities. 

An individual system of values of (.*, y, ~, /) /. e., of 
( r i >r -. 3 ^ 4) sna ^ b called a space-time point. 

Further let denote the velocity vector of matter, c the 
dielectric constant, //. the magnetic permeability, <r the 
conductivity of matter, while p denotes the density of 
electricity in space, and .v the vector of "Electric Current" 
which we shall some across in 7 and 8. 



O PUNOIPLS OF RELATIVITY 

PART I 2. 

THE LIMITING CASE. 

The Fundamental Equations for Atlier. 

By using the electron theory, Lorentz in his above 
mentioned essay traces the Laws of Electro-dynamics of 
Ponderable Bodies to still simpler laws. Let us now adhere 
to these simpler laws, whereby we require that for the 
limitting case =-*, /A=-/,(T = O, they should constitute the 
laws for ponderable bodies. In this ideal limitting case 
e=l, /*=!, <r=o, E will be equal to e, and M to m. At 
every space time point (t, y, ~, f) we shall have the 
equations* 

(i) Curl m gr=/ >u 
(ii) div e= p 
(iii) Curlr +-.*? = 
(iv) div m = o 
I shall now write (.r t x y .r 3 .r 4 ) for (.r, y, z, t) and 

0>i>P 2 > Ps> Pi) for 

( P u,,pu y ,pu r , ip) 

i.e. the components of the convection current pu, and the 
electric density multiplied by \/l. 

Further 1 shall wriU- 

./23<./3 ltfl 2> /I 4>./2 l ./34 

for 

m,, m v , m., ie,, ie , ie.. 

i.e., the components of m and ( i.e.} along the three axes; 
now *f we take any two indices (h. k) out of the series 
(1,2,3,4), /=-/.., 

* See note 9. 



THK FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS FOR ATIIEK 7 

Therefore 

./ ,1 -. = ~~./2 s> f\ 3 = ~"./s i > y 2 1 = *vi - 

/4 1 = ~V I 4> ./ 4 4 = ~/2 4> ./ 4 U = ~~.A 4 

Then the three equations comprised in (i), and the 
equation (ii) multiplied by i becomes 



&i x 8 A ? 

8xj 8x 2 

*/_4J. 8 /4_2 8 /i3 

8x, 8x 2 8x n 

On the other hand, the three equations comprised in (iii) 
and the (iv) equation multiplied by (/) becomes 



^4 , 8/4. /t. . 

8x, 8x a 8x 4 



(B) 



. . 

Sx, " 8x 2 8x 3 
By means of this method of writing \ve at once notice 
the perfect symmetry of the 1st as well as the 2nd system 
of equations as regards permutation with the indices. 
(1, 2, 3, 4). 



It is well-known that by writing the equations f) to 
iv) in the symbol of vector calculus, we at once set in 
evidence an invariance (or rather a (covariance) of the 



8 PKI NT I I M. ol liKI.ATIVITY 

system of equations A) as well as of B), when the co-ordinate 
system is rotated through a certain amount round the 
null-point. For example, if we take a rotation of the 
axes round the z-axis. through an amount <f>, keeping 
e, m fixed in space, and introduce new variables .r/, .r a .r 3 
.r/ instead of ^ ( .r 2 .r, s .r 4 , where 



; r, = ;r, cos < + .r 2 sn <>, .r 2 = .r, sn< + .r 2 
,r 3 =.r 3 .r 4 = 4 , and introduce magnitudes p t , p 2 , p 3 p 4 , 
where p, = p, cos ^> + p L , sin^>, p 2 = p, sin<^> + p 2 cos/> 
aud/".,o, ...... / 8 4, where 



/ H=/t4 COS A +/M sil1 */ / 2 4 = "/I 4 SU1 ^ + 

/ 24 COS ^,./ 3 4=/ : Mi 

/,, = -f kh (h I k = 1,2,3,4). 

then out of the equations (A) would follow a corres 
ponding system of dashed equations (A ) composed of the 
newly introduced dashed magnitudes. 

So upon the ground of symmetry alone of the equa 
tions (A) and (B) concerning the suffices (1, 2, 3, 4), the 
theorem of Relativity, which was found out by Lorentz, 
follows without any calculation at all. 

I will denote by i \j/ a purely imaginary magnitude, 
and consider the substitution 

*i = *i> /= *>>> a = ^3 COR l V r + -"4 H n T ^ (1) 

*/ = x 3 sin ity + ,r 4 cos ? i//, 



Putting - / tan ^ = T = ^ ^ = lo ^ _ 



THE FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS FOR ARTHEtt 

\Vi; shall liavo cos i\f/ = 




where i < q < i, and v/l~? a * s always to be taken 
with the positive sign. 

Let us now write x , = /, ,7/ 2 y i x 3 saz ) x iit (3) 
then the substitution 1) takes the form 



,, 

*= > y=y,z=- >t=- =, (4) 

v/l-^ -x/l-f* 

the coofficients being essentially real. 

If now in the above-mentioned rotation round the 
Z-axis, we replace 1, 2, 3, 4 throughout by 3, 4, 1, 2, and 
< by t ^, we at once perceive that simultaneously, new 
magnitudes p j, p 2 , p 3 , p 4 , where 

(P / i=Pn P =P2> P s=Ps cos e t/ + p 4 sin t^r, p 4 = 

P 3 sin ty + p 4 cos t^r), 
and/ 12 .../ 34 , where 
/ 4 i=/4i cos ty +/ 13 sin 7>,/ 13 = -/ 41 sin V +/ t g 

COS f A, / 3 4 =/ 3 4 , / 3 2 =/ 3 o COS ^ + / 4 2 in t ^, / 4 2 = 
~/32 Sin ^ + /42 COS ^ /I 2 =/18i /** = -/*t 

must be introduced. Then the systems of equations in 
(A) and (B) are transformed into equations (A ), and (B ), 
the new equations being obtained by simply dashing the 
old set. 

All these equations can be written in purely real figures, 
and we can then formulate the last result as follows. 

If the real transformations 4) are taken, and .i/ y z t 
be takes as a new frame of reference, then we shall have 

,KX r-qrn.+l-] 

(5) P=P - , P =P 



p.=pu., 



10 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

e, qm, , , oe.+m, 





(6) e, = 



q* VI 

Then we have for these newly introduced vectors u , e , 
m (with components u x , u r , u/ ; e x , <?/, e/ m x , m y , 
/), and the quantity p a series of equations I ), II ), 
III ), IV) which are obtained from I), II), III), IV) by 
simply dashing the symbols. 

We remark here that e,qm y , e v +qm, are components 
of the vector e+ [ym], where v is a vector in the direction 
of the positive Z-axis, and i v \=q, and [vm~\ is the vector 
product of v and m ; similarly qe t + m,,m f +ge, are the 
components of the vector m[ve]. 

The equations 6) and 7), as they stand in pairs, can be 
expressed as. 

e, + t mV = ( e . +") cos i\ff + (e y +tm y ) sin i\[/, 

ey + im y = (e.+t m,) sin i\j/ + (e y +m y ) cos ty, 

e, -\-irn , ~e t -}-im t . 

If < denotes any other real angle, we can form the 
following combinations : 

t mY) cos. <t>+(e s/ " + im ]/ ) sin </> 

cos. (^ + ^) + (e y +tm y ) sin (<f> + i\j/), 
) sin </> + (e / + t m /) cos. <^> 

sin (<t> + i^) + (e if +im, ) cos. (<^ + ). 



SPECIAL LORENTZ TRANSFORMATION. 

The rl 3 which is played by the Z-axis in the transfor 
mation (4) can easily be transferred to any other axis 
when the system of axes are subjected to a transformation 



SPECIAL LORENTZ TRANSFORMATION 11 

about this last axis. So we came to a more general 
law : 

Let v be a vector with the components v x , v y , v,, 
and let \ v \ =q<l. By we shall denote any vector 
which is perpendicular to v, and by r v , r-^ we shall denote 
components of r in direction of ~y and v. 

Instead of (.r, y, z, t), new magnetudes (x y z t } will 
be introduced in the following way. If for the sake of 
shortness, r is written for the vector with the components 
(x, y, 2) in the first system of reference, r for the same 
vector with the components (x y z } in the second system 
of reference, then for the direction of y, we have 

T^r 

and for the perpendicular direction v, 

(11) r T =r7 

ar.+t 



and further (12) t = / . 

v I q* 

The notations (/-?, r r ) are to be understood in the sense 
that with the directions v, and every direction y~ perpendi 
cular to v in the system (.r, y, z) are always associated 
the directions with the same direction cosines in the system 

(* y, O- 

A transformation which is accomplished by means of 
(10), (11), (12) with the condition Q<q<\ will be called 
a special Lorentz-transformation. We shall call v the 
vector, the direction of v the axis, and the magnitude 
of v the moment of this transformation. 

If further p and the vectors u , e , pt , in the system 
(x y z } are so defined that, 



12 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

further 



(15) (e + V) , = (e + m) i [u, (e + /m)] ,. . 

Then it follows that the equations I), II), III), IV) are 
transformed into the corresponding system with dashes. 
The solution of the equations (10), (11), (12) leads to 

(16) rc 



q 2 q 

Now we shall make a very important observation 
about the vectors u and u . We can again introduce 
the indices 1, 2, 3, 4, so that we write (.* , , # 2 , v z , #/) 
instead of (.c , t/ , ; , it ) and p/, p 2 , p 3 , p^ instead of 
(p 1 u , , p u y , p u , , ip. 

Like the rotation round the Z-axis, the transformation 
(4), and more generally the transformations (10), (11), 
(12), are also linear transformations with the determiuant 
+ 1, so that 

(17) .T 1 a +.r 2 2 +.t s a +. 4 2 i. e. x * + y*+ z *-t\ 
is transformed into 

*!" +. . ," + . s + O 1 e - x *+y *+z 2 -t *. 
On the basis of the equations (13), (14), we shall have 
(p l *+pS+P>*+ P <*)=P*(l-u t >,-u v \-u,*,)=p*(l-u*) 
transformed into p s (l M S ) or in other words, 

(18) p A/l^T* 

is an invariant in a Lorentz-transformation. 

If we divide (p l , p s , p s , p 4 ) by this magnitude, we obtain 

the four values f( 1 , w a , o>,, o> 4 ) = . . (u,, u y , ,, i) 

VI _ M * 

so that a) 1 2 +u) a *+w 3 1 +to 4 f = 1. 

It is apparent that these four values, are determined 
by the vector u and inversely the vector // of magnitude 



SPECIAL L011ENTZ TRANSFORMATION 13 

<i follows from the -1 values o^, oj a , o> 3 , w. t ; where 
(<> 01,, wj are real, *w 4 real and positive and condition 
(ID) is fulfilled. 

The meaning of (<>!,<,, o 3 , <>,) here is, that they are 
the ratios of <Ar lf ilr,, d , rfx 4 to 



(20) V_(d.,: l 

The differentials denoting the displaeements of matter 
occupying the spacetimc point (.c lf . ^ 3 , .i-J to the 
adjacent space-time point. 

After the Lorentz-transfornation is accomplished the 
vococity of matter in the ne\v system of reference for the 
same space-time point (.</ y -J t ) is the vector n with the 

dx <ly dz dl 
ratios -^-,, -J,, ^p, ^p, as components. 

Now it is quite apparent that the system of values 



.( = 



is transformed into the values 

*i = "i i -I a^Wi . 3 = W 3 5 * 4 = o) 4 

in virtue of the Lorentz-transformation (10), (11), (12). 

The dashed system has got the same meaning for the 
velocity // after the transformation as the first system 
of values lias got for n before transformation. 

If in particular the vector v of the special Lorentz- 
transformation be equal to the velecity vector u of matter at 
tin- space-time point (.e,, a?,, r 3 , x 4 ) then it follows out of 
(10\ (11), (12) that 

<o 1 =:o, 0) a = 0, ti) 3 = 0, o> 4 =l 

Under these circumstances therefore, the corresponding 
space-time point has the velocity v = u after the trans 
formation, it is as if we transform to rest. We may call 
the invariant f > ^/ \ M as the re.-t-dcn-ity of Mlectricity.* 

* See Note. 



PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 



5. SPACE-TIME VECTORS. 

Of the hf, and 2nd kind. 

If we take the principal result of the Lorentz transfor 
mation together with the fact that ;he system (A) as well 
as the system (B) is covariant with respect to a rotation 
of the coordinate-system round the null point, we obtain 
the general relativity theorem. In order to make the 
facts easi.ly comprehensible, it may be more convenient to 
define a series of expressions, for the purpose of expressing 
the ideas in a concise form, while on the other hand 
I shall adhere to the practice of using complex magni 
tudes, in order to render certain symmetries quite evident. 

Let us take a linear homogeneous transformation, 
a n a , 55 a t 3 a , 

a 21 22 23 a 2 
a 31 33 a 33 a 3 
_ __ L a 41 42 a 43 4 

the Determinant of the matrix is +1, all co-efficients with 
out the index 4 occurring once are real, while a 4 ,, a 42 , 
a 4 3 , are purely imaginary, but a 4 4 is real and >o, and 
a^ 2 + # 2 2 + 3 2 +^ 4 2 transforms into ^, 2 +# 2 2 + C 3 2 
+ # 4 2 . The operation shall be called a general Lorentz 
transformation. 

If we put x l = ,c t ,r 2 =// , . - 3 = z , ,c 4 = it , then 
immediately there occurs a homogeneous linear transfor 
mation of (*, y, z, f) to (r } y , z , t ) with essentially real 
co-efficients, whereby the aggregrate .c 2 y* ; 2 +t 2 
transforms into v 2 y ~* z - +t *, and to every such 
system of valut^ , y, :, ./ with a positive I, for which 
this aggregate o, there always corresponds a positive t ; 

This notation, whirli is due to Dr. C. E. Cullis of the Calcutta 
University, has been used throughout instead of Minkowski s notation, 



SPACE-TIME VECTORS 



15 



this last is quite evident from the continuity of the 
aggregate .r, y, z, t. 

The last vertical column of co-efficients has to fulfil, 
the condition :!2) a l 4 2 +a. J4 8 + tf 34 a -f-a 44 2 = l. 



If ,i 



= fl 34 = o, then 44 = i, and the Lorentz 



transformation reduces to a simple rotation of the spatial 
co-ordinate system round the world-point. 

If l4 , a s4 , S4 are not all zoro, and if we put 
i4 : fl 4 : 34 : 44 = v , : v -v,:i 



Ou the other hand, with every set of value of 
a i4> rt 4> a 34 fl 44 which in this way fulfil the condition 
I l) with real values of v,, v v , v,, we can construct the 
special Lorentz transformation (.16) with (a^ 4 , 24 , 34 ,a 44 ) 
as the last vertical column, and then every Lorentz- 
transformatiou with the same last vertical column 
(a l4 , a 24 , a 34 , a 44 ) can be supposed to be composed of 
the special Lor(?ntz-transformation, and a rotation of the 
spatial co-ordinate system round the null-point. 

The totality of all Lorentz-Transformations forms a 
group. Under a space-time vector of the 1st kind shall 
be understood a system of four magnitudes Pi,p 8 ,p s , p 4 ) 
with the condition that in case of a Lorentz-transformation 
it is to be replaced by the set p, , p 2 , p 3 , p 4 ), where 
thes; are tlii! v.ilue; oP . /, c./, .-., , .e/), obtaiael by 
sab^tituting (p,, p.}, p.,, p ) for (-,, x j} .- 3 , .- 4 ) in the 
expression (il). 

Besides the time-space vector of the 1st kind (x lt o; 2 , 
*3> - 4) we shall also make use of another space-time vector 
of the first kind (y,, //.,,. // 3 , y 4 ), and let us form the linear 
combination 



-* y.) 



* y s ) 



16 



PRINCIPLE OP RELATIVITY 



with six coefficients /.,/, v . Let us remark that in the 
vectorial method of writing, this can be constructed out of 
the four vectors. 

Ci,as*,#a ; yi,y.,y s ;/ 3 ./si./n ; /i*. A* A* and 

the constants , 4 and y 4 , at the same time it is symmetrical 
with regard the indices (1, 2, 3, 4). 

If we subject (aj lf .r,, , 3 , ,r 4 ) and (y t , y a , y a , y 4 ) simul 
taneously to the Lorentz transformation f21), the combina 
tion (23) is changed to. 

(24) / (,-, y, -.r, y.) +/ sl (a, <//-../ y s ) + /, , 



whei e the coefficients / 83 , / 3 /, / x 2 , / 14 , /, 4 , / 84 , depend 
solely on (/ 8S / 94 ) and the coefficients a lt ...a +4 . 

We shall define a space-time Vector of the 2nd kind 
as a system of six-magnitudes / 2 3 , t / s t ...... / 34 , with the 

condition that when subjected to a Lorentz transformation, 
it is changed to a new system y^./ ...... /" 34J ... which satis 

fies the connection between (23) and (24). 

I enunciate in the following manner the general 
theorem of relativity corresponding to the equations (I) 
(iv), which are the fundamental equations for Ather. 

If ,--, i/, z, it (space co-ordinates, and time if) is sub 
jected to a Lorentz transformation, and at the same time 
(/)/*,, pity, pit ,, ip] (convection-current, and charge density 
pi) is transformed as a space time vector of the I st kind, 
further (m x , m f , )..-, * ,, ie,, if.) (magnetic force, 
and electric induction x ( /) is transformed as a space 
time vector of the :!nd kind, then the system of equations 
(1), (II), and the system of c |inti > is (III), (IV) trans 
forms into essentially corresponding relations between the 
corresponding magnitudes newly introduced into the 
system. 



SPECIAL LORENTZ TRANSFORMATION 17 

These facts can be more concisely expressed iu these 
words : the system of equations (I, and II) as well as the 
system of equations (III) (IV) are covariant in all eases 
of Lorentz-transformation, where (pu, ip) is to be trans 
formed as a space time vector of the 1st kind, (ni ie) is 
to be treated as a vector of the 2nd kind, or more 
significantly, 

(pit, ip) is a space time vector of the 1st kind, (m ie)* 
is a space-time vector of the 2nd kind. 

-I shall add a fe v more remarks here in order to elucidate 
the conception of space-time vector of the 2nd kind. 
Clearly, the following are in variants for such a vector when 
subjected to a group of Lorentz transformation. 



A space-time vector of the second kind (m ie), where 
(m, and e) are real magnitudes, may be called singular, 
when the scalar square (in ie)*= 0) ie m s e t =o i and at 
the >;une time (m e)=o, ie the vector wand e are equal and 
perpendicular to each other; when such is the case, these 
two properties remain conserved for the space-time vector 
oi the 2nd kind in every Lorentz-transformation. 

If the space-time vector of the 2nd kind is not 
singular, we rotate the spacial co-ordinate system in such 
a manner that the vector-product \me\ coincides with 
the Z-axis, i.e. m jt) = o, e,-=o. Then 



Therefore (i- t +i m,, )j(e t +i c x ) is different from +i, 
and we can therefore define a complex argument <j> + i$) 
in such a manner that 

= 

+t m, 

Vide Note. 



18 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

If then, by referring back to equations (9), we carry out 
the transformation (1) through the angle <A, and a subsequent 
rotation round the Z-axis through the angle <, we perform a 
Lorentz-transformation at the end of which m v = o, e v =o, 
and therefore m and e shall both coincide with the new 
Z-axis. Then by means of the invariants m" 2 e* , (me) 
the final values of these vectors, whether they are of the 
same or of opposite directions, or whether one of them is 
equal to zero, would be at once settled. 

% 

CONCEPT OF TIME. 

By the Lorentz transformation, we are allowed to effect 
certain changes of the time parameter. In consequence 
of this fact, it is no longer permissible to speak of the 
absolute simultaneity of two events. The ordinary idea 
of simultaneity rather presupposes that six independent 
parameters, which are evidently required for defining a 
system of space and time axes, are somehow reduced to 
three. Since we are accustomed to consider that these 
limitations represent in a unique way the actual facts 
very approximately, we maintain that the simultaneity of 
two events exists of themselves.* In fact, the following 
considerations will prove conclusive. 

Let a reference system (x,y, z, t) for space time points 
(events) be somehow known. Now if a space point A 
(x,,y , O at the time t a be compared with a space 
point P (.f, y, z) at the time /, and if the difference of 
time tt t , (let t> I.) be less than the length A P i.e. less 
than the time required for the propogation of light from 

* Just as beings which aro confined within a narrow region 
surrounding a point on a shperical surface, may fall into the error that 
a sphere is a geometric figure in which ouo diameter is particularly 
distinguished from the rest. 



CONCEPT OP TIME 19 

A to P, and if q= - < 1, then by a special Lorentz 
A i 

transformation, in which A P is taken as the axis, and which 
has the moment*/, we can introduce a time parameter t , which 
(see equation 11, 12, 4) has got the same value t ==o for 
both space-time points (A, t ), and P, t). So the two 
events can now be comprehended to be simultaneous. 

Further, let us take at the same time t = 0, two 
different space-points A, B, or three space-points (A, B, C) 
which are not in the same space-line, and compare 
therewith a space point P, which is outside the line A B, 
or the plane A B C, at another time t, and let the time 
difference t t t (t > t ] be less than the time which light 
requires for propogation from the line A B, or the plane 
A B C) to P. Let q be the quotient of (t to) by the 
second time. Then if a Lorentz transformation is taken 
in which the perpendicular from P on A B, or from P on 
the plane A B C is the axis, and q is the moment, then 
all the three (or four) events (A, I.), [B, t ), (C, t.) and 
(P, t) are simultaneous. 

If four space-points, which do not lie in one plane are 
conceived to be at the same time t,, then it is no longer per 
missible to make a change of the time parameter by a Lorentz 
transformation, without at the same time destroying the 
character of the simultaneity of these four space points. 

To the mathematician, accustomed on the one hand to 
the methods of treatment of the poly-dimensional 
manifold, and on the other hand to the conceptual figures 
of the so-called non-Euclidean Geometry, there can be no 
difficulty in adopting this concept of time to the application 
of the Lorentz-transformation. The paper of Kinstein which 
has been cited in the Introduction, has succeeded to some 
extent in presenting the nature of the transformation 
from the physical standpoint. 



20 PRINCIPLE OP RELATIVITY 

PART II. ELECTRO-MAGNETIC 
PHENOMENA. 

7. FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS FOR BODIES 
AT REST. 

After these preparatory works, which have been first 
developed on account of the small amount of mathematics 
involved in the limitting case =!,/*= 1, a- = o, let 
us turn to the electro-magnatic phenomena in matter. 
We look for those relations which make it possible for 

us when proper fundamental data are given to 

obtain the following quantities at every place and time, 
and therefore at every space-time point as functions of 
(.r, y, z, t] : the vector of the electric force E, the 
magnetic induction M, the electrical induction <?, the 
magnetic force m, the electrical space-density p, the 
electric current s (whose relation hereafter to the conduc 
tion current is known by the manner in which conduc 
tivity occurs in the process), and lastly the vector u, the 
velocity of matter. 

The relations in question can be divided into two 
classes. 

Firstly those equations, which, when v, the velocity 
of matter is given as a function of (.<-, y, r, (,], lead us to 
a knowledge of other magnitude as functions of .,-, y, r, t 
I shall call this first class of equations the fundamental 
equations 

Secondly, the expressions for the ponderomotive force, 
which, by the application of the Laws of Mechanics, gives 
us further information about the vector u as functions of 

*, y, *, 0- 

For the case of bodies at rest, i.e. when u (x, y, :, t) 
= o the theories of Maxwell (Heaviside, Hertz) and 



FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS FOR BODIES AT REST 21 

Loreoti lead to the same fundamental equations. They 
are ; 

(1) The Differential Equations: which contain no 
constant referring to matter : 



(i) Curl m ~- - C, (iV) div e =>. 



(in) Curl E + - = o, (ir) Div M = o. 

(2) Further relations, which characterise the influence 
of existing matter for the most important case to which 
we limit ourselves i.e. for isotopic bodies ; they are com 
prised in the equations 

(V) e = e E, M = urn, C = <rE. 

where = dielectric constant, /j. = magnetic permeability, 
a- = the conductivity of matter, all given as function of 
c j > "> ^j * is hre the conduction current. 



By employing a modified form of writing, I shall now 
cause a latent symmetry in these equations to appear. 
I put, as in the previous work, 



and write *, s t , 5 3 , * 4 for C,, C y , C, V _ 1 p. 
further /,,,/,,,/, ,,/,,,/,,/,. 
form,,m,,m, t (e., e y , c. ), 
andF ls ,F 31 ,F 19 ,F 14 ,F,.,F S4 
for M., M,, M,, - i (E,, E y , E.) 

lastly we shall have the relation f kk = ,./**, F kll = F )t k, 
(tin- letter/, F shall denote the field, * the (i.e. current). 



22 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

Then the fundamental Equations can be written as 



a/ sl 



3/t, 
3.c 4 



and the equations (3) and (4), are 



3F,. . 



a.., a 3 



= 



8F, t . 



3*, a, 4 



+ ^^- 8 + 



3F,, 



= 



= 



= o 



8. THE FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS. 

"We are now in a position to establish in a unique way 
the fundamental equations for bodies moving in any man 
ner by means of these three axioms exclusively. 

The first Axion shall be, 

When a detached region* of matter is at rest at any 
moment, therefore the vector " is zero, for a system 
* Einzelne stelle der Materie. 



THE FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS 23 

(j-, y, :, /) the neighbourhood may be supposed to be 
in motion in any possible manner, then for the space- 
time point x, y, z, t t the samo relations (A) (B) (V) which 
hold in the case when all matter is at rest, shall also 
hold between p, the vectors C, e, m, M, E and their differ 
entials with respect to x, y, z, t. The second axiom shall 
be: 

Every velocity of matter is <1, smaller than the velo 
city of propogation of light.* 

The fundamental equations are of such a kind that 
when (f, y, z t it) are subjected to a Lorentz transformation 
and thereby (m ie) and (MiE) are transformed into 
space-time vectors of the second kind, (C, ip) as a space-time 
vector of the 1st kind, the equations are transformed into 
essentially identical forms involving the transformed 
magnitudes. 

Shortly I can signify the third axiom as : 

(/#, 1<?), and (W, iE] are space-time vectors of the 
second kind, (C, ip) is a space-time vector of the first kind. 

This axiom I call the Principle of Relativity. 

In fact thes^ three axioms lead us from the previously 
mentioned fundamental equations for bodies at rest to the 
equations for moving bodies in an unambiguous way. 

According to the second axiom, the magnitude of the 
velocity vector | it \ is <1 at any space-time point. In 
consequence, we can always write, instead of the vector u, 
the following set of four allied quantities 

11 - - u - u 

x/n^T 



11 



* Vido Note. 



24 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

with the relation 

(27) Wl 2+ W2 2+ w ,2+ W4 2= | 

From what has been said at the end of 4, it is clear 
that in the case of a Lorent/.-transformation, this set 
behaves like a space-time vector of the 1st kind. 

Let us now iix our attention on a certain point (r, y, z) 
of matter at a certain time (/). If at this space-time 
point u = o, then we have at once for this point the equa 
tions (A), (5) (V) of 7. It u t o, then there exists 
according to 16), in case | n \ <1, a special Lorentz-trans- 
formation, whose vector v is equal to this vector u (.r, y, z, 
t), and we pass on to a new system of reference (? y z I ) 
in accordance with this transformation. Therefore for 
the space-time point considered, there arises as in 4, 
the new values 28) 0)^ = 0, o/ 2 = 0, u/ 3 :=0, u/ 4 =f, 
therefore the new velocity vector o/ = o, the space-time 
point is as if transformed to rest. Now according to the 
third axiom the system of equations for the transformed 
point (.r / z I) involves the newly introduced magnitude 
(n p , C , e , m , E , M } and their differential quotients 
with respect to (x , y , z , t } in the same manner as the 
original equations for the point (x, y, z, t). But according 
to the first axiom, when u = o, these equations must be 
exactly equivalent to 

(1) the differential equations (^ ), (# ), which are 
obtained from the equations (.-/), (/?) by simply dashing 
the symbols in (./) and (B). 

(2) and the equations 

(V ) <? = cA", M = pm , C = a/- 

where e, ^, o- are the dielectric constant, magnetic permea 
bility, and conductivity for the system (./ // : t } i.e. in 
the space-time point (t y, z t) of matter. 



Illl. II MM \II.\T\I. Kor \TIOXS 20 

Now let us return, by means of the- reciprocal Lorentz- 
trausl onnation to (lie original variables (.-, y, :, /), and the 
magnitudes (/ , p, C, <, ///, A , I/) and (he equations, which 
we then obtain from the last mentioned, will be the funda 
mental equations sought by us for the moving bodies. 

Now from 4, and 0, it is to be seen that the equa 
tions .-/), as well as the equations //) are covariant for a 
Lorentz-transformation, />. the equations, which we obtain 
backwards from A } B }, must be exactly of the same form 
am the equations ./) and /> ), as we take them for bodies 
at rest. \Ve have therefore as the first result : 

The differential equations expressing the fundamental 
equations of electrodynamics for moving bodie?, when 
written in p and the vectors C, >% ///, K, M, are exactly of 
the same form as the equations for moving bodies. The 
velocity of matter does not enter in these equations. In 
the rectorial wav of writing, we have 



curl ni = C,, II) div f= 

n i I 



III VMH-! K -f 9 M = o lV)divM=o 

/ U / 

The velocity of matter occut> only in the anxilliary 
equations which characterise the influence of matter mi the 
basis of their characteristic constants e, /<, <r. Let us now 

transform these aiixilliary equations \ ) into the original 
co-ordinates ( , //,:, and /.) 

Acconlin^ to formula 15) in ^ I, the (-omponent of > 
in the direction of tin- vector / i- the same us llial n| 
(?+[H tn ]), the component of /;/ is th" same as that of 
/ [// r], but for the perpendicular direction r>, the com 
ponents of f , ni are the same as those of (+[> ///i)and (/// 

[UP], multiplied by / . On the other hand ! / 



26 IMUXC II I.K 01 i; I.I \livm 

and M shall stand to E + ["M,], and M [Kj in the 
same relation us < aud /// to <! +[>#], and m (//>). 
From the relation c >/ = E , the following- equations i uliow 

(C) r+[ W //,]=c(E+[//M]), 

and from the relation M =//. /, we have 

(D) M-[ttE]=/t(/y/-[/^]), 

For the components in the directions perpendicular 
to / , and to each other, the equations are to be multiplied 
by v fll^: 

Then the following equations follow from the transfer- 
mation equations (12), 10), (11) in $ 4, when we replace 
q, r t , r- r -, t, r ,., r r , ( by | n \ , C,,, C,, p, C . C v, p 

,- C + , C M - 



In cunsideration of the manner in which o- enters into 
these relations, it will be convenient to call the vector 
C p / with the components C, p | / | in the direction of 
/ , and C ,, in the directions T> [lerpendicular to H the 
"Convection current. This last vanishes for <r=o. 

\\ c remark that for =1, //-=! the ecjuations r = E , 
/ = M immediately lead to the equations / E, //i = M 
bv means of a rcciprofid Liu cnt/.-transformatiun with it 
as vector; and for o-=o, the equation C = o leads to C=p i ; 
that the fundamental equations of Ather discussed in 
:i becomes in fact the limitting case of the equations 
obtained here with = 1, /* = !, ^o. 



FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS IN LOKKXT2 THKORY 27 

1). THE FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS IN 
LORENTZ S THEORY. 

Let us now see how far the fundamental equations 
assumed by Lorentz correspond to the Relativity postulate, 
as defined in sjS. In the article on Electron-theory (Ency, 
Math., Wiss., Bd. V. 2, Art 14) Lorentz has given the 
fundamental equations for any possible, even magnetised 
bodies (see there page 200, Eq" XXX , formula (11) on 
page 78 of the same (part). 

(Ul ") Curl (H-[//E]) = J+ ) + / divD 

-curl OD]. 
(1") div !) = /. 

(IV") curl E = -^ , Div 13 = (V) 

Then for moving non-magnetised bodies, Lorentz pubs 
(page :2:!3, :i) ^= 1, B = H, and in addition to that takes 
account of the occurrence of the di-eleetric constant e, and 
conductivity o- according to equations 




Lort iit/ s 1-], 1), II ;irt- here denoted i>v E, M, r, m 
while J denotes the :-onduction cuiTeiit. 

The three last equations which have been just cited 
here coincide with eq" (II), (III), (IV), the first equation 
would be, if J i> identified with C, / /; (the current being 
y.ero for (/ = (), 

(2U) Curl i II -(.,K; j =( f- > -curl[l)i, 



28 1 itfxcii T.K or i! i;r. VTFVITY 

and thus comes out to he in a different form than (1) here. 
Therefore for magnetised bodies, Lorentz s equations do not 
correspond to the Relnti vity Principle. 

On the other hand, tlie form corresponding to the 
relativity principle, for the condition of non -magnetisation 
is to be taken out of (D) in ^S, with i>.= \, not as B = H, 
as Lorentz takes, but as (30) B [>!)] = H [D] 
(M [E]=/;/ [<*] Now by putting 11 = B, the d.flW- 
ential equation ( - ) is transformed into the same form as 
e<j" (1) liere when ;// [//,] =M [K]. Pherefore it so 
happens that by a compensation of two contradictions to 
the relativity principle, the differential equations of Lorentz 
for moving non-magnetised bodies at last agree with the 
relat.ivit v postulate. 

If \ve make use of (- HI) for non-magnetic bodies, and 
pat accordingly Il = IJ-r-[", (D E)], then in conse(|iience 
of (C) in 8, 

(e _]) ( K + r,,,B;) = 0_E+r,,. [;/,D E]], 
is. for the direction of n 



and for a perpendicular direct ion fi, 



i.r. it coincides with L^rent/ s assumjition, if we neglect 
/ - in comparison to 1 . 

Also to the same order of approximation, Lorentz s 
form for J corresponds to the conditions imposed by the 
relativity principle ; eomp. (K) ^ 8] that the components 
of J,, ; -I ftW eijual to the components of <r(E-f [n B]) 

multiplied by ^fZ^i or ^j^TT respectively. 



i I \UAMKXT\T. i;OI ATIONS <>K K. COHEN* 29 

vjlO. I YNDAMKNTAL EQUATIONS OF E. COHN. 

K. Cohn assumes the following fundamental equations. 

(31) Curl (M-f E]) = ^ + u div. E + .T 

Curl [E (//. M)]= _ + n div. M. 
ill 

(32) J = , r E, = cE-|> M], M = /*(y//+[> E.]) 
where I 1 } M are the electric and magnetic field intensities 
(forces), E, M are the electric and magnetic polarisation 
(induction). The equations also permit the existence of 
true magnetism ; if we do not take into account this 
eoiHiderat ion, div. M. is to be put = ft. 

An objection to this svstem of equations is that 
according to these, for = 1, /i =1, the vectors force and 
induction do not coincide. If in the equations, we conceive 
E and M and not E-(t*. M), and M+[T E] as electric 
and magnetic forces, and with a glance to this we 
substitute for E, M, E, M, div. E, the symbols c, M, E 
-fCU M], >// [/ <"], p, then the differential equations 
transform to our equations, and the conditions (32) 

transform into 

J = r(E+0 M]) 

,+ [*, (*-[**])] =(E+[M]) 

then in fart the equations of (John become the same as 
those required by the relativity principle, if errors of the 
order are neglected in comparison to 1. 

It may be mentioned here that the equations of Hertz 
become the same as those of Cohn, if the auxiliary 
conditions are 



. 50 I lil.N l II I.K OF KM I, 

11. TYPICAL HKPKKSKXTATIONS OF THK 
EUND A MENTAL EQUATIONS. 

In the statement of the fundamental equations, our 
leading idea had been that they should retain a eovariance 
of form, when subjected to a group of Lorentz-trans- 
formations. Xo\v we have to deal with ponoeromotive 
reactions and energy in the electro-magnetic field. Here 
from the very first there can be no doubt that, the 
settlement of this question is in some way connected with 
the simplest forms which can be given to (he fundamental 
equations, satisfying the conditions of covarianee. In 
order to arrive at such forms, I shall first of all puf the 
fundamental equations in a typical form which brings out 
clearly their covariaucein case of a Lorentz-transformation. 
Here I am using a method of calculation, which enables us 
to deal in a simple manner with the space-time vectors of 
the 1st, and 2ud kind, and of which the rules, as far as 
required are given below. 

A system of magnitudes ii kk formed into the matrix 



arranged in /; horizontal rows, and // vertical columns is 
called a ft xq series-matrix, and will be denoted by the 
letter A. 

If all the quantities </,.,< are multiplied by (\ the 
resulting matrix will be denoted by CA. 

It the roles of the horizontal rows and vertical columns 
be interchanged, we obtain a yx;; series matrix, which 



AI i;i,i i;i -i,.\ i > i lOHS 



ill 



will In- known ;i> the transposed matrix oi A, aiul will be 
!fiu>1etl 1 V A. 



It we have a second jj x ij series matrix B, 



tl-.en A + B shall denote the j> x y series matrix whose 
members are a,, k -\-bhk. 

2 If we have two matrices 
A=|a M a 

ki a 

where the number of horizontal rows of B, is equal to the 
number of vertical columns of A, then by AB, the product 
of the matrics A and B, will be denoted the matrix 

. i 

,;;f I 

these elements bein^r formed l>y eombinat ion of the 
hori/onlal rows of A with the vertical columns of B. For 
such a point, the associative law (AB) S = A(HS) holds, 
where S is a third matrix which has -ot u many hori/ontal 
rows as B (or A l>) has -^ot vortical columns. 



For the transposed matrix of C=BA, we have C = BA 



.K or RELAIIVITV 



3". We shall have principally to deal with matrir-rs 
with at most four vertical columns and for horizontal 



As a unit matrix (in equations they will be known for 
the sake of shortness as the matrix 1) will be denoted the 
following matrix (4 x 4 series) with the elements. 

(:H) e,, e I2 e 18 c 14 = I 1 o 

0100 
00 1 01 

1 ! 

For a 4x4 series-matrix, Det A shall denote the 
determinant formed of the 4x4 elements of the matrix. 
If det A + o, then corresponding to A there is a reciprocal 
matrix, which we may denote by A 1 so that A -1 A = 1 

A matrix 



./i/s> y.,, 

/, , /, a /, , 

in which the elements fulfil the relation //, < = /,is 
called an alternating matrix. Those relations say that 
the transposed matrix f = ./. Then by /* will be 
the il/ df, alternating matrix 
(35) 



; /,, 



TYPICAL i;i:i iM>i:\Tm<)N.s 



33 



/>. We shall have a 4x4 series matrix in which all the 
elements except those on the diagonal from left up to 
right clown are zero, and the elements in this diagonal 
agree with each other, and are each equal to the above 
mentioned combination in (36). 

The determinant of /is therefore the square of the 

| 
combination, by Det /we shall denote]the expression 



4. A linear transformation 

which is accomplished by the matrix 

A=| a,,. a, 2 , a ls , a, + 
n, 2> "a si a *4 



will be denoted as the transformation A 
By the transformation A, the expression 

.,-}- ,+ ,i4- l is changed into the quadrat ie 

for /// ^ i/,/ / ."/, 

where a Ai =a lt ,*+/. a sA +u sA a 3l ++* 4lt . 

are the members of Jl 1-x ! series matrix which is the 

produrt of A A, the transposed matrix of A into A. li \\\ 
the tranrformation, the rxpn-sion i- cliaiiged to 



inu- t h:ue A A = 1. 



PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 



A has to correspond to the following relition, if trans 
formation (38) is to be a Lorentz-transformation. For the 
determinant of A) it follows out of (39) that, (Det A) 2 = 
1, or Det A= + l. 

From the condition (39) we obtain 

i.e. the reciprocal matrix of A is equivalent to the trans 
posed matrix of A. 

For A as Lorentz transformation, we have further 
Det A= +1, the quantities involving the index 4 once in 
the subscript are purely imaginary, the other co-efficients 
are real, and /* 44 >0. 

5. A space time vector of the first kind* which s 
represented by the 1x4 series matrix, 

(41) *= | *, * s *,, * 4 | 

is to be replaced by ft A in case of a Lorentz transformation 
A. i.e. -f = | ?/ ?.> *../ */ | = | f> i . 2 *s % | A; 
A space-time vector of the 2nd kindt with components /* 2 3 . . . 
/ 34 shall be represented by the alternating matrix 



/,, / 42 -A, o 
and is to be replaced by A" 1 / A in case of a Lorentx. 
tr;insformation [see the rules in 5 ( 23) (24)]. Therefore 
referring to the expression (37), we have the identity 

Det^ (A/A) = DetA. Det*/ Therefore Det V be 
comes an invariant in the case of a Lorentz transformation 
[eeeq. (:Jfi) Sec. 5]. 



* riiJr nut.. 13. 
t T l f/c note 14. 



M en \i fcBPJUU I-.N r.vnoNs 35 

Looking back to (-M), we have i or the dual matrix 
(A./ 1 *A)(A- /A) = A- 1 /VA-Det" /. A- 1 A = Dof i / 
from which it is to he seen that the dual matrix/* behaves 
exactly like the primary matrix/, and is therefore a space 
time vector of the II kind; /* is therefore kiiown as the 
dual space-time vector of/ with components (/ , 4>/ 3 4,/34>) 

OWso/ij). 

0.* If w and ,v are two space-time rectors of the 1st kind 
then by w ,1 (as well as by -v //> ) will be understood tin- 
combination (1-3) w i s v +10,, s.j-Mfg iV 3 + #> 4 ,v,. 

In case of a Loreiitz transformation A, since (wA) (A-v) 
= 10 s, this expression is invariant. If tr x = o, then w 
and s are perpendicular to each other. 

Two space-time rectors of the lirst kind (10, .v) gives us 
a 2 x 1 .series matrix 

W, IV.) 10., 10: 



Then it follows immediately that the system of six 
magnitudes (14) /._, .v 3 to.j *._,, w 3 -v, w l -v 3 , 10 , s.,io* s,, 

behaves in case of a Lorentz-transformation as a space-time 
vector of the II kind. The vector of the second kind with 
the components (It) are denoted by [w, .v]. We see easily 

that Del" [?, v]=o. The dual vector of ["V s ] shall be 
written as [ / , ,v].* 

If //; is a space-time vector of the 1st kind, / of the 
.-eeond kind, / / si^nilies a 1 x 1 series matrix. In case 
of a Ijoivnt/.-traiisfonnation A, f is changed into tr = icA, 
/ into /" = \~ l / A, therefore / /" become> =(/ -AA~ / 
A) = / / \ /. . " / is transformed as a >pace-time vector of 



36 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

the 1st kind.* We can verify, when w is a space-time vector 
of the 1st kind, / of the 2nd kind, the important identity 
(45) O, wf } + O, /*] * = (m w ) f. 
The sum of the two space time vectors of the second kind 
on the left side is to be understood in the sense of the 
addition of two alternating matrices. 

For example, for (a l =o, o; a =:o. w 3 =o, ta. t =i, 

</= I */*! */*, *!/4S, I ; </* = I #3 */! #21 > I 

|> eo/J =0, o, o, /., t , /, 2 , / t , ; [ w a>/*]* = o, o, o, /, 2 ,f i; >J. 2l . 

The fact that in this special case, the relation is satisfied, 
suffices to establish the theorem (45) generally, for this 
relation has a covariant character in case of a LoreNitz 
transformation, and is homogeneous in (wj, w a , o) 3 . w t ). 

After these preparatory works let us engage ourselves 
with the equations (C,) (D,) (E) by means which the constants 
e /x, a will be introduced. 

Instead cf the space vector u, the velocity of matter, we 
shall introduce the space-time vector of the first kind to with 
the components. 



(40) where w 1 2 + w 2 a + co 3 2 + w 
and iw. t >0. 

By F and / shall be understood (lie space time vectors 
of tin- second kind M i\ ]. n> ic. 

In 4> = wF. \vu have a space time vector of the first kind 
with components 



3 ., . ln> 

4jl + w .F^ 

I idc note 15. 



I-YPICM. I;H I;I;SK\TATIONS 37 

The first three quantities (<,, < a , <,) are the components 
of the space-vector IrL+JJi JH . 

^1-1T~ 

and further < 4 = -IfiLjEL . 
^1 w" 

Because F is an alternating matrix, 

(49) O}* = w 1 ^ 1 +w a 4> 2 -|-<jJ 3 4> 3 +oj 4 4> t r=o. 

i.e. & is perpendicular to the vector w ; we can also 
write 4> t =i [w x 4>j +w y 4> a +w.4> 3 ]. 

I shall call the space-time vector <I> of the first kind as 
the Electric Rest Force* 

Relations analogous to those holding between wF, 
E, M, Uphold amongst w/, v, m, u, and in particular otf 
is normal to w. The relation (C) can be written as 

{ C } o)/=e<oF. 

The expression (w/) gives four components, but the 
fourth can be derived from the first three. 

Let us now form the time-space vector 1st kind 
^ = iw/*, whose components are 

*!=-* ( J*,* +"3/4, +*/) 1 

* a = - ( ",/,.,+ !/* *4/) 

*.=-(l/.*+Ji, +",/ 12 ) I 

** = *(*!/ +/! +*|/g, ) J 

Of these, thu first three ! ,. >!/,. J/ S) . irc the .i\ //. \ 
i (iinpo;ients of the space-vector 51) "i ( " ) 



and further (52; f t = / nil/ 
/ 



Fide note 16. 



38 ri;i\( ii i.i. 01 KKI.VIIMTY 

Among these there is tlie relation 

(53) t 1 >V (J > l ty i + M2 ty. 2 + 0)^.1+ c> 4 * 4 =o 
which can also be written as 4 4 =:i (u x fy l + " y ^a ~J""^ s) 

The vector * is perpendicular to ; we can call it the 
\Iay>ietic rest-force. 

Relations analogous to Ihese hold amon^ the quantities 
iwF*, M, E, u and Relation (D) can be replaced by the 
formula 

{ D } -o,F*= /4w /*. 

We can use the relations (C) and (D) to calculate 
F and f from <J> and * we have 

W F - _ $. up* = _ i ^i/. ,,,/ = _ <i,, ,; *--/*. 

and applying the relation (45) and (46), we have 
F= [CD. *J + z>[o. *]* 55) 

/= e[<o. *] + *[.*]* 5G;. 

i.e. F 12 =( Wl $ 1 -w i! * 1 ) + .>[ w /l t -o n * 3 ] ! etc. 
/ la =e(w I * a -w a * l ) + A [o) 3 * 4 -w 4 * 3 ]. etc. 
Let us uo\v consider the space-time vector of the 
second kind [$ *], with the components 

* 8 * 3 -* 3 * 2 , *,* 1 -* 1 * 3 , ^^j,-*,*, -, 
4> i xi/ i _4> 4 ^/ l , <J> 2 \J/ 4 _4)^\I> 2 . cj> 3 l/ + <j> t \i/ 3 J 

Then the corresponding space-time vector of the tir-t 
kind w[*, *] vanishes identically owing to c.(juation> ;>) 
and 33) 



for 

Let us now take the vector of the 1st kind 



the 

. etc. 



TYPICAL i:r.i i:i-si;.\T \TI<>\ 



Then In applying 1 11 (1 (^-"O wo l ^ 
(58) [*.*] = i [u>n] 

i>. ^j^, <P. 2 >I 1 =(w r ,O + o> + $2.,) etc. 
Tho vector fi fulfils the relation 



(which we can write as n + =t (to^Qj +oj y Q 2 +a> 2 Q 3 ) 
and n is also normal (o o>. In case w=o. 
we have * 4 =o, *. v =o, n 4 =o. and 



*i * a * 

I shall call fi. which is a space-time vector 1st kind the 
Rest- Ray. 

As for the relation E), which introduces the conductivity a- 
we have u>S=: ( w i*i + W a s 2 "r^s** + W 4- S ..) 



This expression reives us the rest-density of electricity 
(see 8 and 4). 

Then rl)=s+(t,w) 

represents a space-time vector of the 1st kind, which since 
axi>= 1, is normal to ,>, and which I may call the rest- 
cnrrent. Let us now conceive of the lirst three component 
uf this vector as the (./ // c) co-ordinates of the -pace- 
vector, then the component in the direction ui // is 

C - I " I P = c ~ I u I P - 1 " 

Vll^ A/1 l-" 

and the comiionent in a per])endicular direction is ( ., J u . 

This space-\ector i- conneeted with the space-veefur 
.1 C fiit, which we denoted in ^ as the 
current. 



40 



PRIN r C[IT,K OK KKI.ATIVITY 



Now by comparing with <f>= --o>F, the relation (li!) cm 
be brought into the form 

This formula contains four equations, of which the 
fourth follows from the first three, since this is a space- 
time vector which is perpendicular to w. 

Lastly, we shall transform the differential equations 
(A) and (B) into a typical form. 

12. THE DIFFERENTIAL OPERATOR LOR. 

A 4x4 series matrix 62) S= S,, S 12 S 1S S 14 = | S, A | 
S S1 S a , S 2S S, 4 

S 41 S 42 S 4;t S 44 

with the condition that in case of a Lorentz transformation 
it is to be replaced by ASA, may be called a space-time 
matrix of the II kind. We have examples of this in : 

1) the alternating matrix f, which corresponds to the 
space-time vector of the II kind, 

2) the product f F of two such matrices, for by a transfor 
mation A, it is replaced by (A- 1 /A-A~ I FA)=A~ I /F A, 
M) further when ( MI . ui s . cu a , co 4 ) and (n i; O 2 , s , U 4 ) aiv 
l \vn spare-time veotiu-s of llie 1st kind, the 4x4 matrix with 
tlie element S AA . =w A n A , 

lastly in a multiple L of the unit matrix of 4x4 series 
in which all the elements in the principal diagonal are 
equal to L, and the rest are xero. 

\Yc shall have to do constantly with functions of the 
F pace-time point (.r, >/, :, if], and we may with advantage 



III! IH I KKUK.VIIAI. OI MJATOR LOR 



employ the Ixl series matrix, formed of differential 
symbols, 



a a a a 



or (63) 



a a a a 



3 dy 3: 

For this matrix T shall use the shortened from " lor."* 
Then if S is, as in (62), a space-time matrix of the 

II kind, by lor S will be understood the 1 x 4 series 

matrix 

I K, K, K< K. | 

where K 4 = ^L* + *i* + 



When by a Lorentz transformation A, a new reference 
system (.K\ .<: , x s ,i- 4 ) is introduced, we can use the operator 



lor = 



^ a a a 

8."/ 8.V", 8*, a-, 



Then S is transformed to S =A S A= | S j | , so bj 
lor S is meant the 1x4 series matrix, whose element are 

*ri aS|4.oSjt.as. t j i a s * * 

Now foi 1 the differentiation of any function of (x y t f) 

a a a , , a a , 



we have the rule 



ST . ^ -^ , "T j? W i 

a .* 3 , 3 .* 3 .--, 3 * 

t a 3- 3 , a 3 

+ 3. 8 87T 3^ 3A 

3 3 L 3 , , 3 



3 i 3 * $ 3 

so that, we have symbolically lor = lor A. 



Vide note 17. 



42 PRINCIPLK OK RELATIVITY 

Therefore it follows that 

lor S = lor (A A- SA) = (lor S)A. 

i.e., lor S behaves like a space-time vector of the first 
kind. 

If L is a multiple of the unit matrix, then by lor L will 
be denoted the matrix with the elements 

8L 6L 6L 6L 

8-i 8.I-, 9.t 3 9** 

If # is a space-time vector of the 1st kind, then 
lori =il + . + |il + i... 

8*1 9-c 2 80, o - 4 

In case of a Lorentz transformation A, we have 
lor V=lor A. As = lor *. 

i.e., lor * is an invariant in a Lorentz-transformation. 

In all these operations the operator lor plays the part 
of a space-time vector of the first kind. 

If / represents a space-time vector of the second kind, 
lor f denotes a space-time vector of the first kind with 
the components 



8/i, a/,, , 8/ l4 

a + a + "a 
O , O , 0. + 



a/ , + ._8At.. 

9-f.-, 9- (i , 



a* 



3. + l^ + 8Z 



a/., 



THK DIFFERENTIAL OPKRATOR LOR 43 

So the system of differential equations (A) can be 
expressed in the concise form 

{A} lor/=-, 

and the system (B) can be expressed in the form 
{B} log F* = U. 

Referring back to the definition (H7) for log *, we 
find that the combinations lor (for/), and lor (lor F* 
vanish identically, when f and F* are alternating matrices. 
Accordingly it follows out of {A}, that 

^ & + -& + 1;:- + -& = > 

while the relation 

0>9) lor (lor F*) = 0, signities that of the four 
equations in { B}, only three represent independent 
conditions. 

I shall now collect the results. 

Let w denote the space-time vector of the first kind 

\ 

l_ W 2 Vl-?< 2 / 

(// = velocity of matter), 

F the space-time vector of the second kind (M, >E) 
(M = magnetic induction, E = Electric force, 
./the space-time vector af the second kind (///, />) 
(/ = magnetic force, f= Electric Induction. 
s the space-time vector of the first kind (C. ip) 
(p = electrical space-den>it\ , ( f >/>= com 1 net ivity curn-nt, 
= dielectric constant, // = manin tic penne:il)ility, 
a = conductivity, 



44 PEINCIPLK OK RELATIVITY 

then the fundamental equations for electromagnetic 
processes in moving bodies are* 

{A} lor/=v 
{B}logF* = o 
{C} w/ =oF 
* T-V i TiMf" / "X* 

{B}^^=-*P. 

ww = 1, and W F, w/, o>F*, w/**, + (O>*)<D which 
are space-time vectors of the first kind are all normal to 
w, and for the system {B}, we have 

lor (lor F*) = 0. 

Bearing in mind this last relation, we see that we have 
as many independent equations at our disposal as arc mvt-- 
sary for determining the motion of matter as well as the 
vector 11 as a function of , //, , f, when proper funda 
mental data are given. 

13. THE PRODUCT OF THE FIELD- VECTORS /F. 

Finally let us enquire about the laws which lead to the 
determination of the vector u> as a function of (;,y,:,/.) 
In these investigations, the expressions which are obtained 
by the multiplication of two alternating matrices 



/= 


o A* As 


A* 


F= 


F lt P 18 F,, 




/.i /, 


/.; 




F sl P fa F 14 




/si A* 


A* 




F 31 F 32 F, 4 




A, A, A, 







F+i ^+8 F +s 


* Vide note 19. 



THK PRODUCT OF T1IK KIELU-VKCTORS /F 

are of much importance. Let us write. 



(70) fF= 



8 



S .*-L s ls s 84 

S 3, S 33 -L S.. 

S * a S*., S 44 -L 

Then (71) S I1 +S,,+S 33 +S 44 =0. 

Let L now denote the symmetrical combination of the 
indices I, 2, 3, 4, given by 



= / F 13 +/ 3I P sl+ / lf p if +/14 Fi4 



) 



Then we shall have 

- t;; :; F ;;) 

In order to express in a real form, we write 



(74) S = 



S 81 S 82 S, 3 S 2 + 
Si S,, S 31 S 34 



X, Y, Z, _,T, 
X, Y, Z, -iT, 
X.. >" Z -zT ; 
-iX, -iT, -tZ, T, 



nrJJC.=? r/^M,-^,,^ -m r M r +<.,E.- y E v -,. K.l 



40 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

(75) X,=tn,M,+e.E,, Y,=wi,M,+?,E, etc. 
X,=e,M,-e r M,, T,=m,E,-,E t etc. 



li,=~ 

These quantities are all real. In the theory for bodies 
at rest, the combinations (X,, X,, X., Y., Y,, Y r , Z,, 
Z v , ZJ are known as "Maxwell s Stresses," T,, T,, T, 
are known as the Poynting s Vector, T, as the electro 
magnetic energy-density, and L as the Langrangian 
function. 

On the other hand, by multiplying the alternating 
matrices of,/"* and F*, we obtain 

(77) P*/*=-S 1I -L, -S lt , -S tl . -S 14 

S S1 . S g2 L, S 2S , S 24 

S1 S, 2 , S,, L, S,,. 

S 41 S 4S S 4S S 44 L 
and hence, we can put 

(78) /F = S-L, F*.r*=-S-L, 

where by L, we mean L-times the unit matrix, i.e. the 
matrix with elements 



| L^< . | , (c 4A =l, e**=0, A^A- /*, A-=l, 2, 3,4). 
Since here SL = L^, we deduce that, 

F*/*/F = ( -S-L) (S-L) = - SS + L, 



and find, since/*/ = Dot -/. F* F = Det * F, we arrive 
at the intonating conclusion 

* Vide note 18. 



THE PRODUCT OF NIK M ELU-VKCTORS / 47 

(79) SS = L - Det * / Det * F 

i.r. the product of the matrix S into itself can be ex 
pressed as the multiple of a unit matrix a matrix in which 
all the elements except those in the principal diagonal are 
zero, th* 1 elements in the principal diagonal are all equal 
and have the value given on the right-hand side of. (7 ( J). 
Therefore the general relations 

(80) S M S lt + S*. S at + 6 A , S,*+S 4l S 4 =, 

h, k being unequal indices in the series 1, 2, 3, 4, and 

(81) S M S lA +S*, S,*+S* S S S +S*, S 4 =L a - 

Det * / Det * F, 
for// = 1,2, 3, 4. 

Now if instead of F, and / in the combinations (72) 
and (73), we introduce the electrical rest-force *, the 
magnetic rest-force *, and the rest-ray tt [(55), (56) and 
(57)1, we can pass over to the expressions, 

(82) L = i c * + J p. * *7 
(83 j S 4 

-f- c 



(h, k = 1, 2, 3, 4). 
Here we have 

<|><t> = 4i i +t/+<l> : , +*, , * * = ^, J-*! 1 +**+* 
e AA = 1, e kk o (h=f=k). 

The right side of (82) as well as L is an invariant 
in a Lorentz transformation, and the 4x4 element on the 



48 PRINCII LK OF RELATIVITY 

right side of (83) as well as S* A represent a space time 
vector of the second kind. Remembering this fact, it 
suffices, for establishing the theorems (82) and (83) gener 
ally, to prove it for the special case o> l = o, w, =o, ?/? s =o, 
w 4 =/. But for this case w = o, we immediately arrive at 
the equations (82) and (83) by means (45), (51), (60) 
on the" one hand, and c = eE, M = ps// on the other hand. 

The expression on the right-hand side of (81), which 
equals 

[-5- (m M - <?E)] + (em) (EM), 

^is = o, because (cm c <S> ^, (EM) = /x 4 *; now referring 

> 
back to 79), we can denote the positive square root of this 

expression as Det * S. 

Since f /, and F = - - F, we obtain for S, the 
transposed matrix of S, the following relations from (78), 

(84) F/ = S-L,/* F* = - S-L, 
ThenisS-S= | S*-S,* | 

an alternating matrix, and denotes a space-time vector 
of the second kind. From the expressions (83), we 
obtain, 

(85) S - S~= - (c/t - 1) fa>,n], 

from which we deduce that [see (57), (58)]. 

(86) <o (S - S)* = o, 

(87) w (S -~S) = (e p - 1) O 

When the matter is at rest at a space-time point, u=o, 
then the equation 86) denotes the existence of the follow 
ing equations 

Z y =Y,, X,=Z,, Y,=X,, 



THE PRODUCT OF THE FIELD-VECTORS /> 4 J 

and from 83), 

T,=n if T,=n 2 , T..= :| 

x^t^n,, Y,= f/ ,n 2 . #,=^0, 

Now by means of a rotation of the space co-ordinate 
system round the null-point, we can make, 

Z,=Y.=o. X t =Z,= , X,=X,= . 

. According to 71), we have 
88) X,+Y,+Z.. + T,=o. 

and according to 83), T,>o. In special cases, where Q 
vanishes it follows from 81) that 



and if T, and one of the three magnitudes X,, Y,. Z. are 
= Det * S r the two other.s = - Det ^ S. If fi does not 
vanish let O ^=0, then we have in particular from 80) 

T r X,=0, T s Y,=0, Z,T s+ T t T f =0. 
and if f), =0, 1= 0, Z r =-T, It follows from (81), 
(see also 83) that 



and -Z,=T, = V Det "S-f-e,*!), 

The space-t- me vector of the first kind 
f89) K = lorS, 

is of very o^reat imjwrtanpe for which we now want to 
demons! rnte a very important transformation 

Accord in- to 7*\ S = L+/F, and it follows that 
lor S=lor L + lor/F. 



50 PRINCIPLE OK RELATIVITY 

The symbol lor denotes a differential process which 
in lor /F, operates on the one hand upon the components 
of f, on the other hand also upon the components of F. 
Accordingly lor f can be expressed as the sum of two 
parts. The first part is the product of the matrices 
(lor /) F, lor / being regarded as a 1 x 4- series matrix. 
The second part is that part of lor /F, in which the 
diffentiations operate upon the components of F alone. 
From 78) we obtain 

/F=-F*/*-2L; 

hence the second part of lor /F= (lor F*)/*+ the part 
of 2 lor L, in which the differentiations operate upon the 
components of F alone We thus obtain 



lor S = (lor/)F-(lor 
where N is the vector with the components 



8F.. f 8F S1 6F,, f _ 

-~-~ ~^~ 



<// = !, 2, 3,4) 

By using the fundamental relations A) and B), 90) 
is transformed into the fundamental relation 

(91) lor S = *F + N. 

In the limitting case < = 1. /x = l. /=F. X vanishes 
identically. 



1HI. PRODUCT OF THK FIELD-VECTORS /K 51 

Now upon the basis of the equations (55) and (56), 
and referring back to the expression (82) for L, and from 
57) we obtain the following expressions as components 
of \,_ 

,92) X t =- * ** l_l **_. 





for A=l, 2. 3, 4. 

Now if we make use of (59), and denote the space- 
vector which has 11,, i! 2 , 11 3 as the -,//, - components by 
the symbol W, then the third component of 92) can be 
expressed in the form 



,93) 



The round bracket denoting the scalar product of the 
vectors within it. 



1A. THE PONDEROMOTIVE FORCE.* 

Let us now write out the relation K=lor S = . 
in a more practical form ; we have the four equations 



Vide note 40. 



52 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 



0# v 9Z. QZ, 

_ +_.. _ a _ 



/ 07 \ 1 -K- _ T 9 T y 9 T . 9 T , I? 

(97) K * " <-t^i: 



It is my opinion that when we calculate the pondero- 
motive force which acts upon a unit volume at the space- 
time point . , y, :, /, it lias got, .<, y, - components as the 
first three components of the space-time vector 



This vector is perpendicular to w ; the law of Energy 
Jiiids iti expression in the fourth relation. 

The establishment of this opinion i^ reserved for a 
separate tract. 

In the limitting case =1, /*=!, <r=0, the vector N=0, 
S=p(D, wK^^O, and we obtain the ordinary equations in the 
theory of electrons. 



APPENDIX 
MECHANICS AND THE RELATIVITY- POSTULATE. 

It would be very unsatisfactory, if the new way of 
looking at the time-concept, which permits a Lorentz 
transformation, were to be confined to a single part of 
Phvsics. 

Now many authors say that classical mechanics stand 
in opposition to the relativity postulate, which is taken 
to be the basii of the new Electro-dynamics. 

In order to decide this let us fix our attention upon a spe 
cial Lorentz transformation represented by (Hi), (H), (1 -)> 
with a vector v in any direction and of any magnitude <y<l 
but different from zero. For a moment we shall not suppose 
any special relation to hold between the unit of length 
and the unit of time, so that instead of /, / , <y, we shall 
write ct, ct , and q/c, where c represents a certain positive 
constant, and -7 is <c. The above mentioned equations 
arc transformed into 



, 
c 1 q </ 

They denote. as we remember, that r is the space-voMor 
(>y> -)> s th 1 space-vector ( y ) 

If in these equations, kcej>ing constant we approach 
the limit c = oo, then we obtain from these 



The new e(|Uatiniis would now denote the transforma 
tion of a -patial co-ordinate system (*, y, :) to another 
spatial co-ordinate \>t. in ( y - ) with parallel axt-s, the 



54 IMUNCIl LK OF RELATIVITY 

null point of the second system moving with constant 
velocity in a straight line, while the time parameter 
remains unchanged. We can, therefore, say that classical 
mechanics postulates a covariance of Physical laws for 
the group of homogeneous linear transformations of the 
expression 



+* (1) 

when c = <x. 

Now it is rather confusing to find that in one branch 
of Physics, we shall find a eovariance of the laws for the 
transformation of expression (1) with a finite value of c, 
iu another part for c=oc. 

It is evident that according to Newtonian Mechanics, 
this covariance holds for c=oo } and not for == velocity of 
light. 

May we not then regard those traditional covariances 
for f = oo only as an approximation consistent with 
experience, the actual covariance of natural laws holding 
for a certain finite value of c. 

I may here point out that by if instead of the Newtonian 
Relativity-Postulate with e=oc, \ve assume a relativity- 
postulate with a finite c, then the axiomatic construction 
.of Mechanics appears to gain considerably in perfection. 

The ratio of the time unit to the length unit is chosen 
in a manner so as to make the velocity of light equivalent 
to unity. 

While now I want to introduce geometrical figures 
in the manifold of the variables ( , //, -, /), it may be 
convenient to leave (y, ) out -F account, and to treat s 
and t as any possible pair of co-ordinates in a plane, 
refered to oblique axes. 



APl KXUIX 55 

\ space time null point (.r, y, -, /=0, 0, 0, 0) will be 
kept fixed in a Lorentx. transformation. 

The figure * -y a -z* +* = !, />0 ... (2) 

which represents a hyper holoidal shell, contains the space- 
time points A (j-, y, :, / = 0, 0, 0, 1), and all points A 
which after a Lorentz-transformation enter into the newly 
introduced system of reference as (.r , y , -. , / = 0, 0, 0, 1). 

The direction of a radius vector OA drawn from to 
the point A of (2), and the directions of the tangents to 
(2) at A are to be called normal to each other. 

Let us now follow a definite position of matter in its 
course through all time t. The totality of the space-time 
points ( , t/, r, which correspond to the positions at 
different times /, shall be called a space-time line. 

The task of determining the motion of matter is com 
prised in the following problem: It is required to establish 
for every space-time point the direction of the space-time 
line passing through it. 

To transform a space-time point P (*, y, ~, f) to rest is 
equivalent to introducing, by means of a Lorentx transfor 
mation, a new system of reference ( , y , - , t }, in which 
the t axis has the direction OA , OA indicating the direc 
tion of the space-time line passing through P. The space 
=const, which is to be laid through P, is the one which 
is perpendicular to the spuce-time line through P. 

To the increment /// of the time of P corresponds the 
increment 



of the newly introduced time parameter /". The value of 
the intesrral 



56 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

when calculated upon the space-time line from a fixed 
initial point P to the variable point P, (both being on the 
space-time line), is known as the Proper-time of the 
position of matter we are concerned with at the space-time 
point P. (It is a generalization of the idea of Positional- 
time which was introduced by Lorentz for uniform 
motion.) 

If we take a body R* which has got extension in space 
at time t , then the region comprising all the space-time 
line passing- through R* and / shall be called a space-time 
filament. 

If we have an anatylical expression 6(.\> y, ?, /) so that 
Q(x, y z t) = ft is intersected by every space time line of the 
filament at one point, whereby 

*.\ -( 
a \ 

then the tolality of the intersecting points will be called 
a cross section of the filament. 

At any point. P of such across-section, we can introduce 
by means of a Lorentz transformation a system of refer 
ence (/, y, : t), so that according to this 



. 

8.. 8y 

The direction of the uniquely determined / axis in 
question here is known as the upper normal of the cross- 
section at the point P and the value of r/J=/ J / <L> ,hj ,f : 
for the surrounding points of P on the cross-section is 
known as the elementary contents (Inhalts-element) of the 
cross-section. In this sense R" is to be regarded as the 
cross-section normal to the / axis of the filament at the 
point /=i", and the volume of the body R is to be 
regarded as the contents of the cross- section. 



APPENDIX 57 

If we allow R to converge to a point, we oome to the 
conception of an infinitely thin space-time filament. In 
such a case, a space-time line will be thought of as a 
principal line and by the term Proper-time of the filament 
will be understood the Proper-time which is laid along 
this principal line ; under the term normal cross-section 
of the filament, we shall understand the cross-section 
upon the space which is normal to the principal line 
through P. 

We shall now formulate the principle of conservation 
of mass. 

To every space R at a time t, belongs a positive 
quantity the mass at R at the time t. If R converges 
to a point (.c, y, :, /), then the quotient of this mass, and 
the volume of R approaches a limit p.(x, t/, :, t), which is 
known as the mass-density at the space-time point 



The principle of conservation of mass says that for 
an infinitely thin space-time filament, the product /*//.}, 
where /x= mass-density at the point (.r, y t : , /) of the fila 
ment (i.e., the principal line of the filament), //.I =eontents 
of the cross-section normal to the / axis, and passing 
through ( ,y,:, t), is constant along the whole filament. 

Now the contents f/J. of the normal cross-section of 
the filament which is laid through (, t/, :, f) is 



(4) 



</! 



and the function v= ^ =n\ / \_. l * =/*-2l. (5) 
iw 4 O 

may be defined as the rest-mass density at the position 
8 



58 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

(xyzf). Then the principle of conservation of mass can 
be formulated in this manner : 

For an infinitely thin space-time fi/amenl, tJie product 
of the rest-mass density and the contents of the normal 
cross-section is constant atony the whole filament. 

In any space-time filament, let us consider two cross- 
sections Q." and Q , which have only the points on the 
boundary common to each other ; let the space-time lines 
inside the filament have a larger value of i on Q than 
on Q. . The finite range enclosed between ti and Q 
shall be called a space-time sic/tel* Q is the lower 
boundary, and Q is the upper boundary of the nickel. 

If we decompose a filament into elementary space-time 
filaments, then to an entrance-point of an elementary 
filament through the lower boundary of the nickel, there 
corresponds an exit point of the same by the upper boundary, 
whereby for both, the product vdJ, taken in the sense of 
(4) and (5), has got the same value. Therefore the difference 
of the two integrals jW/ n (the first being extended over 
the upper, the second upon the lower boundary) vanishes. 
According to a well-known theorem of Integral Calculus 
the difference is equivalent to 

//// lor vu dfdydzdt, 

the integration being extended over tin whole range of 
the Kic/icl, and (comp. (67), 15) 

, -_ 8vo> 1 8 <i) 2 , 8^3 , 3va) 4 

D11 " -- + - + - + -- 



If the nickel reduces to a point, then the differential 
equation lor vw = 0, (6) 

* Sichel a German word meanintr a crescent or a scythe. The 
original terra is retained as there is no snitnble Knli.sli equivalent. 



\iTi\m\ 59 

which is the- condition of cortinuity 



-* , . r , / _ 

a* a^ a-- f<8< 

Further let us form the integial 

N=SISJvdlyd:dt (7) 

extending over the whole range of the space-time .tic/tcl. 
We shall decompose the sichel into elementary space-time 
filaments, and every one of these filaments in small elements 
dr of its proper-time, which are however large compared 
to the linear dimensions of the normal cross-section ; let 
us assume that the mass of such a lilament vdJ n =dm and 
write T" , r l for the Proper-time of the upper and lower 
boundary of the sichel. 

Then the integral (?) cau be denoted by 

IJvdJn </T=/(T -T ) dm. 
taken over all the elements of the sichel. 

Now let us conceive of the space-time lines inside a 
space-time nichd as material curves composed of material 
points, and let us suppose that they are subjected to a 
continual change of length inside the sichel in the follow 
ing manner. The entire c-urves are to be varied in any 
possible manner inside the *ic/tc(, while the end points 
on the lower and upper boundaries remain fixed, and the 
individual substantial points upon it are displaced in such a 
manner that they al \va\s move forward normal to the 
curves. The whole pit, cess may be analytically repre 
sented by means t ,f a parameter \, nnd to the value \ = o, 
shall correspond the actual curves inside the .v/ 7/t7. Such a 
process may be called a virtual displacement in the sichel. 

Let the point (.r, _//, r, /) in the sichel \ = o have the 
values .r + S--, .// + fy, .- + 8-, f + /, when the parameter has 



60 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

the value A ; these magnitudes are then functions of (./, y, 
z, /, A). Let us now conceive of an infinitely thin space- 
time filament at the point (j- y : f) with the normal section 
of contents dj n , and if dJ n +&dJ K be the contents of the 
normal section at the corresponding position of the varied 
filament, then according to the principle of conservation 
of mass (v + dv being the rest-mass-deusity at the varied 
position), 

(8) (v + Sv) (dJ + Sd J ) = i/rfj = dm. 



In consequence of this condition, the integral (7) 
taken over the whole range of the sichel, varies on account 
of the displacement as a definite function N + 8N of X, 
and we may call this function N + SN as the mass action 
of the virtual displacement. 

If we now introduce the method of writing with 
indices, we shall have 

(9) rf(a 4 +8.- 4 )=cl,- 4 + 2 !?* + ^ d\ 

k O r k OA 

*= 1,2,3,4 
^=1,2,3,4 

Now on the basis of the remarks already made, it is 
clear that the value of N + SN, when the value of the 
parameter is A, will be : 



(10) 



the integration extending over the whole sichel <( 
where ^(r + Sr) denotes the magnitude, which is deduced from 



Jd ., + d$x t ) _(dx s +d8x~)* r ^(~d.i> 4 +dS .> 
by means of (9) and 



APPENDIX 

therefore : 



= 1, 2, 3, 4. 

1 = 1, 2, 3, 4. 

We shall now subject the value of the differential 
quotient 

(12) 



to a transformation. Since each 8- A as a function of (r, y, 
z, vanishes for the zero-value of the paramater A., so in 

, do.l t 

general ---- =o, for \ = o. 

O. - * 



Let us now put ( - - * ) = A (/* = !, 2, 3, 4) (13) 



then on the basis of (10) and (11), we have the expression 
(12):- 



,1 B (Jy d: dt 

for the system (a-, ./-., ./ , r 4 ) on the boundary of the 
Kic/i -f, (8.r, 8r 2 &r 3 8 } ) shall vanish for every value of 
\aiul therefore ,, a ,f,, 4 are nil. Then by partial 
integration, the integral is transformed into the form 



* w -U rw*tf, , 8"w*, 

-i "^v ~a^r 

Jj; <hj 1 1 . 



6-1 PRINCIPLE OF NEGATIVITY 

the expression within the bracket may be written as 



The first sum vanishes in consequence of the continuity 
equation (6). The second may be written as 

au (l> l Qw k dcy Qw h di s a<o A dc 4 

~ 



( l*> k d (dr k 

dr dr\dr 



whereby is meant the differential quotient in the 

t/T 

direction of the space-time line at any position. For the 
differential quotient (12), we obtain the final expression 



dx d>/ //- tit. 

For a virtual displacement in the Kiclicl we have 
postulated the condition that the points Hijipnsi d to be 
substantial shall advance normally to the curves i^ivinjf 
their actual motion, which is \ o; this condition denotes 
that the A is to satisfy the condition 

H I ^i+ 8 ^ a +w 3 3 +;* f= . (15) 

Let us now turn our attention to the Mnxwellian 
tensions in the electrodynamics of stationary bodies, and 
let us consider the results in 1:1 and 13; then we find 
that Hamilton s Principle can be reconciled to the relativity 
postulate for continuously extended elastic media. 



M PKXDIX 



At every space-time point (as in 13), let a space time 
matrix of the ind kind be known 



(16) S= 



where X, Y, ...... X x , T, are real magnitudes. 

For a virtual displacement in a space-time siohel 
(with the previously applied designation) the value of 
the integral 



s lt 


B M 


S 18 S I4 |= 


x, 


Y, 


z, -n\ 


s tl 


S 2Z 


SQ 
83 8 + 




X, 


Y y 


Z v -iT y 


S 3l 


S 39 


So 
33 to 3* 




x.. 


Y, 


Z r -iT : 


S 41 


S 4 , 


S 43 S 4* 




-;x 


/ ft 


r, -z, T r 



(17) 



dzdt 



extended over the whole range of the sichel, may be called 
the tensional work of the virtual displacement. 

The sum which comes forth here, written in real 
magnitudes, is 

Xi V i f~I i rn * xr O O " . -\y- U O.F , rw O ^* 
j+lyT^t rA/ r-A-j -^ + -". y f- ...Li. 

o.i ay 3r 

X a . -l-T ^ 8 + T ^ 8/ 

a / a . a / 

we can now postulate the following minimum principle in 
mechanics. 

If any space-timr Si,-//,-/ /,< Lovndeil , tlicu for each 
rirtitiit jfaplacement /// th<- $i<-h> l , ilte mini of Hie w/r/.v.s 1 - 
works, and tension works s/nilf ahcm/x lie mi c>tremum 
for that process of the spacr-lime line in the 8ie/n 
occurs. 

The meaning is, that for each virtual displacement,. 



A=0 



(1*5 



64. PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

By applying the methods of the Calculus of Varia 
tions, the following four differential equations at once 
follow from this minimal principle by means of the trans 
formation (H), and the condition (15). 

(19) v 9 . =K,+ x!t -, (7, = l,a : S4) 
,,,onee K, = + * 



are components of the space-time vector 1st kind K lor S, 
and X is a factor, which is to be determined from the 
relation tv^j= 1. By multiplying (19) by w k , and 
summing the four, we obtain X = Kw, and therefore clearly 
K + (Kw}w will be a space-time vector of the Jst kind which 
is normal to w. Let us write out the components of this 

vector as 

X, Y, Z,-/T 

Then we arrive at the following equation for the motion 
of matter, 



(21) =X , =T ; ,- =Z, 

dr \drj dr 



( | =T, and we have also 
ar \dr/ 



and X f + Y + Z I : =T < . 

</T (Zr </T (?T 

On the basis of this condition, the fourth of equations (21) 
is to be regarded as a direct consequence of the first three. 

From (21), we can deduce the law for the motion of 
a material point, i.e., the law for the career of an infinitely 
thin space-time filament. 



APPENDIX 65 

Let *, v, 2, f, denote a point on a principal line chosen 
in any manner within the filament. We shall form the 
equations ( 21) for the points of the normal cross section of 
the filament through s t y t z, /, and integrate them, multiply 
ing by the elementary contents of the cross section over the 
whole space of the normal section. If the integrals of the 
right side be R, R y R t R, and if m be the constant mass 
of the filament, we obtain ^ 



R is now a space-time vector of the 1st kind with the 
components (R, R y R. R,) which is normal to the space- 
time vector of the 1st kind w, the velocity of the material 
point with the components 

d.f dy dz . dt 

,r > ~T ~j * T 
(IT <ir <IT </T 

We may call this vector R t/ie moving force of the 

material point. 

If instead of integrating over the normal section, we 
integrate the equations over that cross section of the fila 
ment which is normal to the / axis, and passes through 
( s.4V,0, then [See (4)] the equations (2:!) art- obtained, but 

are now multiplied by ; in part ioular, the last equa 
tion comes out in the form, 



The right side is to be looked upon x the amount of u-ork 
(hue per unit <>f li/ne at the material point. In this 
9 



66 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

equation, we obtain the energy-law for the motion of 
the material point and the expression 



may be called the kinetic energy of the material point. 
Since tit is always greater than tlr we may call the 

quotient - r as the " Gain " (vorgehen) of the time 

over the proper-time of the material point and the law can 
then be thus expressed ; The kinetic energy of a ma 
terial point is the product of its mass into the gain of the 
time over its proper-time. 

The set of four equations (22) a^ain shows the sym 
metry in (s&tsj), which is demanded by the relativity 
postulate; to the fourth equation however, a higher phy 
sical significance is to be attached, as we have already 
seen in the analogous case in electrodynamics. On the 
ground of this demand for symmetry, the triplet consisting 
of the first three equations are to be constructed after the 
model of the fourth ; remembering this circumstance, we 
are justified in saying, 

" If the relativity-postulate be placed at the head of 
mechanics, then the whole set of laws of motion follows 
from the law of energy." 

I cannot refrain from showing that no contradiction 
to the assumption on the relativity-postulate can be 
expected from the phenomena of gravitation. 

If B*(.>*, /*, z* t /*) be a solid (fester) space-time point, 
then the region of all those space-time points B (./, i/, z, /), 
for which 



VIM KXDIX 67 

may be called a " Hay-figure " (Strahl-gebilde) of the space 
lime point B*. 

A space-time line taken in any manner can be cut by this 
figure only at one particular point ; this easily follows from 
the convexity of the figure on the one hand, and on the 
other hand from the fact that all directions of the space- 
time lines are only directions from B* towards to the 
concave side of the figure. Then B* may be called the 
light-point of B. 

If in (23), the point ( y z /) be supposed to be fixed, 
the point (t* t/* c* (*) be supposed to be variable, then 
the relation (:J#) \vould represent the loeus of all the space- 
time points ft*, which are light-points of B. 

Let us conceive that a material point F of mass m 
may, owing to the presence of another material point F*, 
experience a moving force according to the following law. 
Let us picture to ourselves the space-time filaments of F 
and F* along with the principal lines of the filaments. Let 
BC be an infinitely small element of the principal line of 
F ; further let B* be the light point of B, C* be the 
light point of C on the principal line of F*; so that 
OA i.s the radius vector of the hyperboloidal fundamental 
figure (23) parallel to B*C*, finally D* is the point of 
intersection of line B*C* with the space normal to itself 
and passing through B. The moving force of the mass- 
point F in the space-time point B is now the space- 
time vector of the first kind which is normal to BC, 
and which is composed of the vectors 

3 

(21) ;;*( ( j\ ) HI)* in the direction of BD*, and 
another vector of Mutable \;i.lue in direction of B*C*. 



68 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

Now by ( - - # J is to be understood the ratio of the two 

vectors in question. It is clear that this proposition at 
once shows the covariant character with respect to a 
Lorentz-group. 

Let us now ask how the space-time filament of F 
behaves when the material point F* has a uniform 
translate ry motion, i.e., the principal line of the filament 
of F* is a line. Let us take the space time null-point in 
this, and by means of a Lorentz-transformation, we can 
take this axis as the /-axis. Let .* , y, z, t, denote the point 
B, let T* denote the proper time of B*, reckoned from O. 
Our proposition leads to the equations 



/ae\ <* _ 




where (27) , c * +y* + ^ 2 =(t- 



In consideration of (27), the three equations (25) are 
of the same form as the equations for the motion of a 
material point subjected te attraction from a fixed centre 
according to the Newtonian Law, only that instead of the 
time t, the proper time r of the material jx>int occurs. The 
fourth equation (2(>) gives .then the connection between 
proper time and the time for the material point. 

Now for different values of T, the orbit of the space- 
point (.r y z] is an ellipse with the semi-major axis a and 
the eccentricity e. Let E denote the excentric anomaly, T 



A1TKND1X 69 

the increment of the proper time for a complete description 
of the orbit, finally n~T = 2tr, so that from a properly chosen 
initial point T, we have the Kepler-equation 

(29) nr=E-e sin E. 

If we now change the unit of time, and denote the 
velocity of light by c, then from (28), we obtain 

i* 1-fecosE 



Now neglecting c~* with regard to 1, it follows that 
7, 7 f i i m * l-fcosE~l 

*="*L 1+t i^ssffiJ 

from which, by applying (29), 

(31) nt + const =( 1 + ^-^ \ wr-f SinE. 
\ ac* / ac 2 

the factor ^ is here the square of the ratio of a certain 

average velocity of F in its orbit to the velocity of light. 
If now w f denote the mass of the sun, a the semi major 
axis of the earth s orbit, then this factor amounts to 10~ s . 

The law of mass attraction which has bn-n just describ 
ed and which is foimnlated in accordance with the 
relativity j>ostu!a<e would signifv that gravitation is 
propagated with the velocity of light. In view of the fact 
that the periodic terms in (31) are very small, it. is not 
possible to decide out of astronomical observations between 
such a law (with the modified mechanics pro|K>sed above) 
Hnd the Newtonian law of attraction with Newtonian 
mechanics. 



70 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

SPACE AND TIME 

A Lecture delivered before the Naturforscher Yer- 
sarnmlung (Congress of Natural Philosophers) at Cologne 
(21st September, 1908). 
Gentlemen, 

The conceptions about time and space, which I hope 
to develop before you to-day, has grown on experimental 
physical grounds. Herein lies its strength. The tendency 
is radical. Henceforth, the old conception of space for 
itself, and time for itself shall reduce to a mere shadow, 
and some sort of union of the two will be found consistent 
with facts. 

, I 

Now I want to show you how we can arrive at the 
changed concepts about time and space from mechanics, as 
accepted now-a-days, from purely mathematical considera 
tions. The equations of Newtonian mechanics show a two 
fold in variance, (i) their form remains unaltered when 
we subject the fundamental space-coordinate system to 
any possible change of position, (//) when we change the 
system in its nature of motion, / . e., when we impress upon 
itanv uniform motion of translation, the null-point of time 
plays no part. We are accustomed to look upon the axioms 
of geometry as settled once for all, while we seldom have the 
same amount of conviction regarding the axioms of mecha 
nics, and therefore the two invariants are seldom mentioned 
in the same breath. Each one of these denotes a certain 
group of transformations for the differential equations of 
mechanics. Wo look upon the existence of the first group 
as a fundamental characteristics of space. We always 
prefer to leave off tin: second group to itself, and with a 
li^ht In-art, conclude that we can never decide from physical 
considerations whether the space, which is supposed to be 



APPENDIX 71 

at rest, may not finally be in uniform motion. So those two 
groups lead quite separate existences besides each other. 
Tlu-ir totally heterogeneous character mav scare us away 
from the attempt to compound them. Vet it is the whole 
compounded group which as a whole gives us occasion for 
thought. 

We wish to picture to ourselves the whole relation 
graphically. Let ( < , i/, z) be the rectangular coordinates of 
space, and / denote the time. Subjects of our perception 
are always connected with place and time. No one has 
observed a place except at a particular time, or Tias obserred 
a time except at a particular place. Yet I respect the 
dogma that time and space have independent existences. I 
will call a space-point plus a time-point, i.e., a system of 
values x, ;/, -, /, as a n-or Id-point. The manifoldness of all 
possible values of r, //, z, t, will be the world. I can draw 
four world-axes with the chalk. Now any axis drawn 
(onsi..ts of quickly vibrating molecules, and besides, takes 
part in all the journevs of the earth ; and therefore gives 
us occasion for reflection. The greater abstraction required 
for the four-axes does not cause the mathematician any 
trouble. In order not to allow any yawning gap to 
exist, wo shall suppose that at every place and time, 
something perceptible exists. In order not to specify 
either matter or elect ric.it \ , we shall simplv style these as 
substances. \Vo direct our attention to the ti-nrlil-pohil 
, y, :, t, and suppose that wo are in a position to recognise 
this substantial point at any subsequent time. Let- t/f he 
the time element corresponding to the changes of space 
coordinates of this point [t/.r, /It/, if:]. Then we obtain (as 
a picture, so to speak, of the perennial life-career of the 
substantial point), a curve in the world the Karltl-linr, 
the points on which unambiguously correspond to the para 
meter / from + oo to oc. Tho whole world appears to be 



72 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

resolved in sucli world-lives, and I may just deviate from 
my point if I say that according to my opinion the physical 
laws would find their fullest expression as mutual relations 
among these lines. 

By this conception of time and space, the (,#, c) mani- 
folduess / = o and its two sides /<o and ^>o falls asunder. 
If for the sake of simplicity, we keep the null-point of time 
and space fixed, then the first named group of mechanics 
signifies that at f = o we can give the ., y, and r-axes any 
possible rotation about the null-point corresponding to the 
homogeneous linear transformation of the expression 



The second group denotes that without changing the 
expression for the mechanical laws, we can substitute 
(.v-at,y-pt, z-yt} for (.-, y, z) where (a, p, 7 ) are any 
constants. According to this we can give the time-axis 
any possible direction in the upper half of the world />o. 
Now what have the demands of orthogonality in spaco to 
do with this perfect freedom of the time-axis towards the 
upper half ? 

To establish this connection, let us take a positive para 
meter c, and let us consider the figure 



According to the analogy of the hyperboloid of two 
sheets, this consists of two sheets separated by ( = o. Let us 
consider the sheet, in the region of l>o, and let us now 
conceive the transformation of .-, y, r, / in the new system 
of variables ; (,/, y , z , t ) by means of which the form of 
the expression will remain unaltered. Clearly the rotation 
of space round the null-point belongs to this group of 
transformations. Now we can have a full idea of the trans 
formations which we picture to ourselves from a particular 



AI HKMHX 73 

tHUuforaialkm in which (y, r) remain unaltered. Let 
us draw the cross section of the upper sheets with the 
plane of the .r- and /-axes, i.e., the upper half of 
the hyperbola -c-l - = ] f witli its asymptotes (///// 
fig. 1). 

Then let n draw the radius rector OA , the tangent 
A B at A , and let us complete the parallelogram OA 
B C ; also produce B C to meet the -axis at D . 
Let us now take Ox , OA as new axes with the unit mea 
suring rods OC = 1, OA = ; then the hyperbola is again 

expressed in the fonii < ( - - = 1, t >o and the transi 
tion from (.-, i/ y -, /) to ( - i/z t} is one of the transitions in 
|iif-iioii. L-it us add to this characteristic transformation 
any possible displacement of the space and time null-points ; 
then we get a group of transformation depending only on 
, which we may denote by CJ r . 

N"MW let as, increase c to infinity. Thus - becomes zero 

c 

:uxl it :i])]icii - > i rdu the figure that the h\ pei - l)ol:i is j^radu- 
all\- shrunk into the -;i\i<. the asymptot ic nnglc lic- 
i-n iie-- :i -tnii^hi one, and everv <|irf-[;>.! 1 nmsfninrit ion in 
tlie limit changes in s ich :i manner that the /-axis (-in 
Miv possible dir;"-tiun upwiirds, and m>iv -ind 

i ") -oxiin:ites tn . Remembering this point it is 
"leiv that the full group belonging to Newtonian Mechanics 
is siiii)>ly the n roup (i r , with the value of c=oo. In this 
state iii aiTairs, :inl sinre ( ! is in:tt hemat ically more iu- 
iellin ible thii i (r -x>, a mat hem ; . , b\ a i n-e p!:iv 

ol imagination, hit upon the thought that natural pheno 
mena possess nn invarianre not only for the group ( <,, 
but in i ai-l also for a uroup d , , where c is lintte, but yet 

10 



74 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

exceedingly large compared to the usual measuring units. 
Such a preconception would be an extraordinary triumph 
for pure mathematics. 

At the same time I shall remark for which value of c, 
this invariance can be conclusively held to be true. For <, 
we shall substitute the velocity of light c in free space. 
In order to avoid speaking either of space or of vacuum, 
we may take this quantity as the ratio between the electro 
static and electro-magnetic units of electricity. 

We can form an idea of the invariant character of the 
expression for natural laws for the group-transformation 
G, in the following manner. 

Out of the totality of natural phenomena, we can, by 
successive higher approximations, deduce a coordinate 
system (., y, z, t) ; by means of this coordinate system, we 
can represent the phenomena according 1o definite laws. 
This system of reference is by no means uniquely deter 
mined by the phenomena. We can change the system of 
reference in any possible manner corresponding to the abore- 
meniioned group transformation G c , bnt the expressions for 
natural laws will not be changed thereby. 

For example, corresponding to the above described 
figure, we can call t the time, but then necessarily the 
space connected with it must be expressed by the mani- 
foldness (,/ y :). The physical laws are now expressed by 
means of ,< , ?/, :, t 1 , and the expressions are just the 
same as in the case of .-, y, z, t. According to this, we 
shall have in the world, not one space, but many spaces, 
quite analogous to the case that the three-dimensional 
space consists of an infinite number of planes. The three- 
dimensional geometry will be a chapter of four-dimensional 
physics. Now you perceive, why I said in the beginning 



APPENDIX 75 

that time and .space shall reduce to mere shadows and we 
shall have a world complete in itself. 

II 

Now the question may be asked, what circumstances 
lead us to these changed views about time and space, are 
they not in contradiction with observed phenomena, do 
they finally guarantee us advantages for the description of 
natural phenomena ? 

Before we enter into the discussion, a very important 
point must be noticed. Suppose we have individualised 
time and space in a,ny manner; then a world-line parallel 
to the -axis will correspond to a stationary point ; a 
world-line inclined to the -axis will correspond to a 
point moving uniformly ; and a world-curve will corres 
pond to a point moving in any manner. Let us now picture 
to our mind the world-line passing through any world 
point r,y,z,i; now if we find the world-line parallel 
to the radius vector OA of the hyperboloidal sheet, then 
we can introduce OA as a new time-axis, and then 
according to the new conceptions of time and space the 
substance will appear to be at rest in the world point 
concerned. We shall now introduce this fundamental 
axiom : 

Tin , substance <?</*////// at am/ worfil point can always 
!,< fiiiK-fircil to be, af resf, if ice .flatifix\\ vnr lime and 
space Kiiifafj///. The axiom denotes that in a world-point 
tho expression 

,.*,/(.* _,/.,-! _,/// _,/;* 

shall always be positive or what is equivalent to the 

same thing, every velocity V should be smaller than c. 

>hall therefore be the upper limit for all substantial 

velocities and herein lies a deep significance for the 



76 I KINTIM.K 01- I! 

quantity <. At the first impression, the axio: 
be rather unsatisfactory. It is to be remembered that 
only a modified mechanics will occur, in which the square 
root of this differential combination takes the place of 
time, so that cases in which the velocity is greater than c 
will play no part, something like imaginary coordinates 
in geometry. 

The impulse and real cause of inducement for tlie 
assumption, of the yroup-kranisforniatioii G r is the fact that 
the differential equation for the propagation of light in 
vacant spase possesses the group- transformation G r . On 
the oth-3r hand, the idea of rigid bodies has any sense 
only in a system mechanics with the group G x . Now 
if we have an optics with G,., and on the other h; inl 
if there are rigid bodies, it is easy to see that a 
/-direction can be defined by the two hyperboloidal 
shells common to the groups G x , and G f , which Ins 
got the further consequence, that by means of suitable 
rigid instruments in the laborafory, we can perceive a 
change in natural uhcnomena, in case of different orienta 
tions, with regard to the direction of progres-ive motion 
of the earth. But all efforts directed towards this 
object, and even the celebrate! interference-experiment 
of Michelson have u iven negative results. In order to 
supply an explanation for this result, II. A. L. rent/ 
formed a hypothesis -vhich practically amounts to an 
invanance of optics i or ihe ;roup G,.. Aeeordi 
Lorent/ every substance shall Mifi er a contraction 

1 ( v ~ ~ ) " ^ ll - tn > " the direction of its motion 




\ITI,.\|l|\ 7? 

l in> hypothesis sounds rather phantastical. For the 
.rtion is nut to be thought of as a consequence of tin; 
resistance of ether, but purely as a gift from the skies, as a 
sort oF condition always accompanying a state of motion. 

I shall show in our figure that Lorentz s hypothesis 
is fully equivalent to the new conceptions about time and 
space. Thereby it may appear more intelligible. Let us 
now, for the sake of simplicity, neglect (y, z} and fix our 
attention on a two dimensional world, in which let upright 
strips parallel to the /-axis represent a state of rest and 
another parallel strip inclined to the /-axis represent a 
state of uniform motion for a body, which has a constant 
s:nti:il extension (see fipf. l). IF O.\ is parallel to the second 
strip, we can take / as the /-axis and x as the *-axis, then 
ond body will appear to be at rest, and the first body 
in uniform motion. We shall now assume that the first 
body supp is,- 1 to be at rest, has the length /, i.e., the 
cross seutidn PP of the first strip upon the , -axis = / OC, 
\vlu-re OC is the unit measuring rod upon the s-axig and 
the second bodv also, when supposed to beat rest, has the 
same l.-u^th /, this means that, the cross section Q Q of 
the -e .-oud strip has :i <Tnss-soct,ion / OC , when measured 
p;irall -l 1 > tin- -axis. In th ;se two bodies, we have 
no\v images of \\\- > Lorentz-ele ctr6bs, one of which ifl a; 
rest ;nd the oilier moves iinifurinlx . Now if we stick 
t. our original Coordinates, then the extension of the 
iveii ov (lie cross section (Id of the 

strip lielon^iii ^ to it nie::sui--ii p:-. rallel to the -;i\is. 
Nov. if i| ,-!,;,! -iuc,. (i U =r/()C . that U(4 = / O1) . 



If if 1 " ;in (>;ls . v falcnhtion u ives that 



01) = OC x ,- therefore 




78 fRlNCiPLK OK RELATIVITY 

This is the sense of Lorentz s hypothesis about tlie 
contraction of electrons in case of motion. On the other 
hand, if we conceive the second electron to be at rest, 
and therefore adopt the system (* , ( ,) then the cross-section 
P P of the strip of the electron parallel to OC is to be 
regarded as its length and we shall find the first electron 
shortened with reference to the second in the same propor 
tion, for it is, 

P ^L_2H_P _ QQ 
CPQ ? -OC / -OC ~ PP 

Lorentz called the combination I of (t and ,) as the 
local Li ne (Ortszeil) of the uniformly moving electron, and 
used a physical construction of this idea for a better compre 
hension of the contraction-hypothesis. But to perceive 
clearly that the time of an electron is as good as the time 
of any other electron, i.e. t, t are to be regarded as equi 
valent, has been the service of A. Einstein [Ann. d. 
Phys. 891, p. 1905, Jahrb. d. Radis... 4-1-1 1 1907] There 
the concept of time was shown to be completely and un 
ambiguously established by natural phenomena. But the 
concept of space was not arrived at, either by Einstein 
or Lorentz, probably because in the case of the above- 
mentioned spatial transformations, where the (./, / ) plane 
coincides with the - plane, the significance is possible 
that the ^-axis of space some-how remains conserved in 
its position. 

We can approach the idea of space in a corresponding 
manner, though some may regard the attempt as rather 
fantastical. 

According to these ideas, the word " Relativity-Postu 
late" which has been coined for the demands of invariance 
in the group (r, seems to be rather inexpressive for a true 
understanding of the group G f , and tor further progress. 



\PPENDIX 79 

Because the sense of the postulate is that the four- 
dimensional world is given in space and time by pheno 
mena only, but the projection in time and space can 
be handled with a certain freedom, and therefore I would 
rather like to give to this assertion the name " The 
Populate of the Absolute worM" [World- Postulate]. 



Ill 



By the world-postulate a similar treatment of the four 
determining quantities x,i/ t z, t, of a world-point is pos 
sible. Thereby the forms under which the physical laws 
come forth, gain in intelligibility, as I shall presently show. 
Above all, the idea of acceleration becomes much more 
striking and clear. 

I shall again use the geometrical method of expression. 
Let us call any world-point O as a " Space-time-null- 
point." The cone 



consists of two parts with O as apex, one part having 
/<() , the other having />0. The first, which we may call 
f\\e fore-cant consists of all those points which send light 
towards O, the second, which we may call the aft-cone. 
consists of all those points which receive their light from 
O. The region bounded by the fore-cone may be called 
the fore-side of O, and the region bounded by the aft-cone 
may be called the aft-side of O. (Fide fig. :>). 

On the aft-side of O -p have the already considered 
hyperboloidal shell F = rV - r 2 -y* -z" = 1, t>0. 



80 HlMXCIl I.K Ol RELATIVITY 

Hie region inside the two cones will be ocoupibd by the 

hvperboloid f one sheet 

F= s+j/ + v- 2 ^t^k-, 

where 9 can liave all possible positive values. The 
hyperbolas which lie upon this figure with O as centre, 
are important for us. For the sake of clearness the indivi 
dual branches of this hyperbola will be called the " Tnter- 
liyperbola. with centre 0." Such a hyperbolic branch, 
when thought of as a world-line, would represent a 
motion which for / = o and t = <x>, asymptotically 
approaches the velocity of light <. 

If, by way of analogy to the idea of vectors in space, 
we call any directed length in the manifoldness -,//,:,/ a 
vector, then we have to distinguish between a time-vector 
directed from O towards the sheet + F 1, />0 and a 
space-vector directed from O towards the sheet F = 1. 
The time-axis can be parallel to any vector of the first 
kind. Any world-point between the fore and aft cones 
of O, mav by means of the system of reference be regard --d 
either as synchronous with O, as well as later or earlier 
than O. Every world-point on the fore-side of O is 
nece-ssarilv always earlier, every point on the nft side of 
O, later thin O. Tin limit f oa corresponds to a com 
plete folding up of fcbfe wcdgc-shawd cross-section bet \\.v.i 
the. fore and aft cones in the taanifoldofess / = (). In the 
figure drawn, this cvos-s-scc! ion Ins been intentional!;- 
drawn with a different breadth. 

Let us decompose a vector drawn iV.>in O t "\\-ards 
(.r,//,/,/) into its components. If the directions of the two 
ve< tors are respectively the directions of the radius vector 
OR to one of tin- surfaces +F=l,find of a tangt-nt IIS 



APPENDIX 81 

at tin- point R of the surface, then the vectors shall be 
called normal to each other. Accordingly 



which is the condition that the vectors with the com 
ponents (-, y, :, /) and (f l // L z^ /j) are normal to each 
other. 

For the measurement of vectors in different directions, 
the unit measuring rod is to be fixed in the following 
manner; a space-like vector from to F = I is always 
to have the measure unity, and a time-like vector from 

O to -|- F= 1, />() is always to have the measure . 

Let us now fix our attention upon the world-line of a 
substantive point running through the world-point (r, y, 
;, 1} ; then as we follow the progress of the line, the 
quantity 



Vc*dt* dx* dy* dz* , 
c 



corresponds to the time-like vector-element (dr, dy, dz, dt}. 
The integral T= I dr, taken over the world-line from 

any fixed initial point P ( , to any variable final point P, 
may be called the " Proper-time " of the substantial point 
at P upon the irnrlil-H.i*-. We may regard (r, y, :, t], I.e., 
the components of the vector OP, as functions of the 

" proper-time " T; let (.r, //, ?, f) denote the first different ial- 
((iiotifMts, and (.r, //, r, /) the s(>cond differential quotients 



of ( , /, :, with regard to T, then tlu si- may respectively 
11 



82 I UIXCIL Lli OF RELATIVITY 

he called the Velocity -vector, and the Acceleration-rector 
of the substantial point at P. Now we have 



2 t f X , ( y y z O ) , 



i.e., the Velocity -vector is the time-like vector of unit 
measure in the direction of the world-line at P, the Accele 
ration-vector at P is normal to the velocity-vector at P, 
and is in any case, a space-like vector. 

Now there is, as can be easily seen, a certain hyperbola, 
which has three infinitely contiguous points in common 
with the world-line at P, and of which the asymptotes 
are the generators of a fore-cone and an aft-cone. 
This hyperbola may be called the " hyperbola of curvature " 
at P (vide tig. 3). If M be the centre of this hyperbola, 
then we have to deal here with an Inter-hyperbola with 
centre M. Let P = measure of the vector MP, then we 
easily perceive that the acceleration-vector at P is a vector 



of magnitude - in the direction of MP. 
P 



If r, y, z, t are nil, then the hyperbola of curvature 
at P reduces to the straight line touching the world-line 
at P, and p = <x . 

IV 

In order to demonstrate that the assumption of the 
group Cr r for the physical laws does not possibly lead to 
anv contradiction, it is unnecessary to undertake a revision 
of the whole of physics on the basis of the assumptions 
underlying this group. The revision has already been 
successfully made in the case of " Thermodynamics and 



APPENDIX 



Radiation,"* i or "Electromagnetic phenomena ",t and 
linally i or "Mechanics with the maintenance of the idea of 



For this last mentioned province of physics, the ques 
tion may be asked : if there is a force with the components 
X, Y, Z (in the direction of the space-axes) at a world- 

point (x, y } z, f), where the velocity-vector is (f, y, z, t), 

then how are we to regard this force when the system of 
reference is changed in any possible manner ? Now it is 
known that there are certain well-tested theorems about 
the ponderomotive force in electromagnetic fields, where 
the group G r is undoubtedly permissible. These theorems 
lead us to the following simple rule ; {/ the system of 
reference be changed in any way, then the supposed force is 
to be put as a force in the new space-coordinates in such n 
warmer, that the corresponding rector with the components 

*X, (?Y, t Z, /T, 

where T= ( -4- X -f ~ J - Y + T- Z^ = l (the rate of 
r 1 \ / t t c- 



irork is done at the world-point}, remains unaltered. 
This vector is always normal to the velocity-vector at P. 
Such a force-vector, representing a force at P, may be 

calk-il a inuriiiii / oro -recfur <it P. 

X \v the world-line passing through P will be described 
1)\- a substantial point with the constant mechaincut ///</vv 
///. Let us call tn-ii>ii< x the velocity-vector at P as the 

I liiiii k, YAM- Dynnmik bcwrgtor svRtemo, Ann. d. physik, Bd. JO, 
1908, p. 1. 

t II. MinkoNvski ; the ji:issn, o refers to paper (2) of the present 
edition. 



84- PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

iwpuhe-r.er.tor, and m-times the acceleration-vector at P as 
the force-vector of motion, at P. According to these 
definitions, the following law tells us how the motion of 
a point-mass takes place under any moving force-vector* : 

The force-vector of motion is equal to the moving force- 
vector. 

This enunciation comprises four equations for the com 
ponents in the four directions, of which the fourth cnn be 
deduced from the first three, because both of the above- 
mentioned vectors are perpendicular to the velocity-vector. 
From the definition of T, we see that the fourth simply 
expresses the " Energy-law/ Accordingly c z -times the 
component of the impulse-vector in the direction of the 
t-avis is to be defined as the kinetic-energy of the point- 
mass. The expression for this is 



i.e., if we deduct from this the additive constant me 2 , we 
obtain the expression 4 mv- of Newtonian-mechanics upto 

magnitudes of the order of . Hence it appears that the 

energy depends upon the xyxlcm oj reference. But since the 
/-axis can be laid in the direction of any time-like MM S, 
therefore the energy-law comprises, for any possible system 
of reference, thr> whole system of equations of motion. 
This fact retains its significance even in the limitinir rase 
C = oo, for the axiomatic construction of Newtonian 
mechanics, as has already been pointed out by T. R. 
Schiiix.t 

* Minkowski Mechanics, appendix, page G."> of paper (U). 

Planck -\Vrh. d. I). P. (I. Vol. 4, 1906, p. 136 
f St-hutz, fiott. Nuclir. 1897, p. 110. 



Al I KMMX 85 

From the very beginning, we can establish the ratio 
between the units of time and space in such a nr.mner, thai 
the velocity of light becomes unity. If we now write 
\/~l / = /, in the place of /, then the differentia] expression 

,h - = - (dx - + <ly a + ilz * + ill - ), 

becomes symmetrical in ( , //, .", /) ; this symmetry then 
enters into each law, which does not contradict the worfit- 
jjoxtnlafe. We can clothe the "essential nature of this 
postulate in the mystical, but mathematically significant 
formula 

rH0 5 frm=i ^l Sec. 



The advantages arising from the formulation of the 
world-postulate are illustrated by nothing so strikinglv 
as by the expressions which tell us about the reactions 
exerted by a point-charge moving in any manner accord 
ing to the Ma \\vell-Fjorentz theory. 

Let us conceive of the world-line of such an electron 
with the charge (f), and let us introduce upon it the 
" Pr. p r-(ime " T reckoned from any possible initial point. 
In order to obtnin the lieM oau.-ed bv the electron at anv 
world-point I , let us construct the fore-cone belonging 
to P, (ridi tig. 4). Clearly this etits tin- nnliinit-d 
world-line of the electron at a single point P, because these 
directions are all time-like vectors. At P, let us draw the 
tangent to the world-line, and let us draw from P, the 
normal to tin s tangent. Let r be the measure of P,Q. 
According to the definition of a fore-cone, rfc is to be 
reckoned as th- measure of PU. Now at the world-point P,, 



Ob PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

the vector-potential of the field excited by e is represented 
by the vector in direction PQ., having the magnitude 

in its three space components along the x-, y-, --axes ; 

the scalar-potential is represented by the component along 
the -axis. This is the elementary law found out by 
A. Lienard, and K. "Wiechert.* 

If the field caused by the electron be described in the 
above-mentioned way, then it will appear that the division 
of the h eld into electric and magnetic forces is a relative 
one, and depends upon the time-axis assumed ; the two 
forces considered together bears some analogy to the 
force-screw in mechanics ; the analogy is, however, im 
perfect. 

I shall now describe the ponderonwlivc force which is 
exerted by one moving electron upon another moving electron. 
Let us suppose that the world-line of a second point- 
electron passes through the .world-point Pj. Let us 
determine P, Q, r as before, construct the middle-point M 
of the hyperbola of curvature at P, and finally the normal 
MN upon a line through P which is parallel to QPj. 
"With P as the initial point, we shall establish a system 
of reference in the following way : the /-axis will be laid 
along PQ, the a -axis in the direction of QPj. The t ?/-axis 
in the direction of MN, then the r-axis is automatically 
determined, as it is normal to the . -, t/-, ^-axes. Let 

1, y, z, 7 be the acceleration-vector at P, .< ,, y l} z ,, /, 

be the velocity- vector at P,. Then the force-vector exerted 
bv the first election e, (moving in any possible manner) 

* Lionard, L Eolnirnpi clcctriqne T 10, 1896, p. :{. 
Wirchert, Ann. <1. Pliysik, Vol. 4. 



Al I ENDIX 87 

upon the ><(< .mil election >-, (likewise moving in any 
1 o>>iblc manner) at I , is represented by 



For the components F Jt 7" 7 y , F., F, of the rector F the 
following three relations hold : 



and fourthly this vector F is normal to the velocity-vector 
P,, a ltd through this circumstance alone, its dependence on 
f/iis laxf relitcity-vector arises. 

If we compare with this expression the previous for 
mula 3 * giving the elementary law about the ponderomotive 
action of moving electric charges upon each other, then we 
cannot but admit, that the relations which occur here 
reveal the inner essence of full simplicity first in four 
dimensions ; but in three dimensions, they have very com 
plicated projections. 

In the mechanics reformed according to the world- 
postulate, the disharmonies which have disturbed tin- 
relations between Newtonian mechanics, and modern 
electrodynamics automatically disappear. I shall now con 
sider the position of the Newtonian law of attraction to 
this postulate. I will assume that two point-masses m and 
w, describe their world-lines ; a moving force-vector is 
exercised by m upon /#,, and the expression is just tin- saun 
as in the case of the electron, only we have to write 
+ >//;;/, instead of ee^. We shall consider only the special 
C;IM- in which tlu- acceleration-vector of in is always zero : 

* K. Sdiwar/.si-liild. (iott-N aclir. 1903. 

II. A. Lorcntz, Ens/Uopidie dor Math. \Vi.<.-i iiM-haftm V. Art 14, 



PRINCIPLE OF KKI.AT1VITY 

then / may be introduced in such a manner that m may be 
regarded as fixed, the motion of m is now subjected to the 
moving-force vector of m alone. If we now modify this 



given vector by writing f - i 



instead of / 



to magnitudes of the order -j ), then it appears that 

Kepler s laws hold good for the position (r,,^, z v ), of 
MI at any time, only in place of the time l l} we have to 
write the proper time T, of m l . On the basis of this 
simple remark, it can be seen that the proposed law of 
attraction in combination with new mechanics is not less 
suited for the explanation of astronomical phenomena than 
the Newtonian law of attraction in combination with 
Newtonian mechanics. 

Also the fundamental equations for electro-magnetic 
processes in moving bodies are in accordance with the 
world-postulate. I shall also show on a later occasion 
that the deduction of these equations, as taught by 
Lorentz, are by no means to be given up. 

The fact that the world-postulate holds without excep 
tion is, 1 believe, the true essence of an electromagnetic 
picture of the world ; the idea first occurred to Lorentz, its 
essence was first picked out by Einstein, and is now gradu 
ally fully manifest. In course of time, the mathematical 
consequent s will be gradually deduced, and enough 
suggestions will be forthcoming for the experimental 
verification of the postulate ; in this way even those, who 
find it uncongenial, or even painful to give up the old, 
time-honoured concepts, will be reconciled to the new ideas 
of time and space, in the prospect that they will lead to 
pre-established harmony between pure mathematics and 
physics. 



The Foundation of the Generalised 
Theory of Relativity 

BY A. EINSTEIN. 

From Annalen der Physik 4.49.1916. 
The theory which is sketched in the following pages 
forms the most wide-going generalization conceivable of 
what is at present known as " the theory of Relativity ; " 
this latter theory I differentiate from the former 
"Special Relativity theory," and suppose it to be known. 
The generalization of the Relativity theory has been made 
ranch easier through the form given to the special Rela 
tivity theory by Miukowski, which mathematician was the 
first to recognize clearly the formal equivalence of the space 
like and time-like co-ordinates, and who made use of it in 
the building up of the theory. The mathematical apparatus 
useful for the general relativity theory, lay already com 
plete in the "Absolute Differential Calculus/ which were 
based on the researches of (jauss, Riemaun and Christoffel 
on the non-Euclidean manifold, and which have been 
shaped into a system by Ricci and Levi-civita, and already 
applied to the problems of theoretical physics. I have in 
part B of this communication developed in the simplest 
and clearest manner, all the supposed mathematical 
auxiliaries, not known to Physicists, which will be useful 
for our purpose, so that, a study of the mathematical 
literature is not necessary lor an understanding of this 
paper. Finally in this place I thank my friend Grossmann, 
by whose help I was not only spared the study of the 
mathematical literature pertinent to this subject, but who 
also aided me in the researches on the field equations of 
gravitation. 
It 



90 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 



PRINCIPAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT THE POSTULATE 
o* RELATIVITY. 

1. Remarks on the Special Relativity Theory. 

The special relativity theory rests on the following 
postulate which also holds valid for the Galileo-Newtonian 
mechanics. 

Tf a co-ordinate system K he so chosen that when re 
ferred to it, the physical laws hold in their simplest forms 
these laws would be also valid when referred to another 
system of co-ordinates K which is subjected to an uniform 
translational motion relative to K. We call this postulate 
" The Special Relativity Principle." By the word special, 
it is signified that the principle is limited to the case, 
when K has uniform trandalory motion with reference to 
K, but the equivalence of K and K does not extend to the 
case of non-uniform motion of K relative to K. 

The Special Relativity Theory does not differ from the 
classical mechanics through the assumption of this j>ostu- 
late, but only through the postulate of the constancy of 
light-velocity in vacuum which, when combined with the 
special relativity postulate, gives in a well-known way, the 
relativity of synchronism as well as the Lorenz-transfor- 
mation, with all the relations between moving rigid bodie 
and clocks. 

The modification which the theory of space and time 
has undergone through the special relativity theory, is 
indeed a profound one, but a weightier point remains 
untouched. According to the special relativity theory, the 
theorems of geometry are to be looked upon as the laws 
about any jwssible relative positions of solid bodies at rest, 
and more generally the theorems of kinematics, as theorems 
which describe the relation between measurable bodies and 



GENRRAI.1.41U TIIMMn h RKT.ATIVITY 91 

clocks. Consider two material points of a solid bodv at 
rest ; then according to these conceptions their corres- 
jx>nd8 to these points a wholly definite extent of length, 
independent of kind, position, orientation and time of the 
body. 

Similarly let us consider two positions of the pointers of 
a clock which is at rest with reference to a co-ordinate 
syetem ; then to these positions, there always corresponds, 
a time-interval of a definite length, independent of time 
and place. It would he soon shown that the general rela 
tivity theory can not hold fast to this simple physical 
significance of space and time. 

2. About the reasons which explain the extension 
of the relativity-postulate. 

To the classical mechanics (no less than) to the special 
relativity theory, is attached an episteomological defect, 
which was perhai* lirst cleanly pointed out by E. Mach. 
We shall illustrate it by the following example ; Let 
two fluid bodies of equal kind and magnitude swim freely 
in space at such a great distance from one another (and 
from all other masses) that only that sort of gravitational 
forces art- to be taken into account which the |>art of any 
of these bodies exert UJKJII each other. The distance of 
the bodies from one .another is invariable. The relative 
motion of the different parts of each body is not to occur. 
But each mass is seen to rotate, by an observer at rest re 
lative to the other mass round the. connecting line of the 
masses with a constant angular velocity (definite relative 
motion for both the masses). Now let us think that the 
surfaces of both the bodies (S, and S 8 ) are measured 
with the help of measuring rods (relatively at rest) ; it is 
then found that the surface of S, is a sphere and the 
uiface of the other i* an ellipsoid of rotation. We now 



92 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

ask, why is this difference between the two bodies . An 
answer to this question can only then be regarded as satis 
factory from the episteomological standpoint when the 
thing adduced as the cause is an observable fact of ex 
perience. The law of causality has the sense of a definite 
statement about the world of experience only when 
observable facts alone appear as causes and effects. 

The Newtonian mechanics does not give to this question 
any satisfactory answer. For example, it says : The laws 
of mechanics hold true for a space Rj relative to which 
the body S, is at rest, not however for a space relative to 
which S 8 is at rest. 

The Galiliean space, which is here introduced is how 
ever only a purely imaginary cause, not an observable thing. 
It is thus clear that the Newtonian mechanics does not, 
in the case treated here, actually fulfil the requirements 
of causality, but produces on the mind a fictitious com 
placency, in that it makes responsible a wholly imaginary 
cause B, for the different behaviour? of the bodies S, and 
S a which are actually observable. 

A satisfactory explanation to the question put forward 
above can only be thus given : that the physical system 
composed of S t and S s shows for itself alone no con 
ceivable cause to which the different behaviour of S, and 
S, can be attributed. The cause must thus lie outside the 
system. We are therefore led to the conception that the 
general laws of motion which determine specially the 
forms of S, and S, must be of such a kind, that the 
mechanical behaviour of S, and S, must be essentially 
conditioned by the distant masses, which we had not 
brought into the system considered. These distant masses, 
(and their relative motion as regards the bodies under con 
sideration) are then to be looked upon as the seat of the 
principal observable causes for the different behaviours 



KALISED THEORY OF RELATIVITY 9S 

of the bodies under consideration. They take the place 
of the imaginary cause R,. Among all the conceivable 
spaces R t and R a moving in any manner relative to one 
another, there is a priori, no one set which can be regarded 
as affording greater advantages, against which the objection 
which was already raised from the standpoint of the 
theory of knowledge cannot be again revived. The laws 
of physics must be so constituted that they should remain 
valid for any system of co-ordinates moving in any manner. 
We thus arrive at an extension of the relativity postulate. 

Besides this momentous episteomological argument, 
there is also a well-known physical fact which speaks in 
favour of an extension of the relativity theory. Let there 
be a Galiliean co-ordinate system K relative to which (at 
least in the four-dimensional- region considered) a muss at 
a sufficient distance from other masses move uniformlv in 
a line. Let K be a second co-ordinate system which has 
a uniformly accelerated motion relative to K. Relative to 
K any mass at a sufficiently great distance experiences 
an accelerated motion such that its acceleration and the 
direction of acceleration is independent of its material com 
position and its physical conditions. 

Can any observer, at rest relative to K , then conclude 
that he is in an actually accelerated reference-system ? 
This is to be answered in the negative ; the above-named 
behaviour of the freely moving masses relative to K can 
be explained in as good a manner in the following way. 
The reference-system K has no acceleration. In the space- 
time region considered there is a gravitation-field which 
generates the accelerated motion relative to K. . 

This conception is feasible, because to us the experience 
of the existence of a field of force (namely the gravitation 
field) has shown that it possesses the remarkable property 
of imparting the same acceleration to all bodies. The 



i>4 PRINCIPLE OP RELATIVITY 

mechanical behaviour of the bodies relative to K is the 
same as experience would expect of them with reference 
to systems which we assume from habit as stationary; 
thus it explains why from the physical stand-point it can 
be assumed that the systems K and K can both with the 
same legitimacy be taken as at rest, that is, they will be 
equivalent as systems of reference for a description of 
physical phenomena. 

From these discussions we see, that the working out 
of the general relativity theory must, at the same time, 
lead to a theory of gravitation ; for we can " create " 
a gravitational field by a simple variation of the co-ordinate 
system. Also we see immediately that the principle 
of the constancy of light-velocity must be modified, 
for we recognise easily that the path of a ray of light 
with reference to K must be, in general, curved, when 
light travels with a definite and constant velocity in a 
straight line with reference to K. 

3. The time-space continuum. Requirements of the 
general Co-variance for the equations expressing 
the laws of Nature in general. 

In the classical mechanics as well as in the special 
relativity theory, the co-ordinates of time and space have 
an immediate physical significance ; when we say that 
any arbitrary point has .ri as its X, co-ordinate, it signifies 
that the projection of the point-event on the X,-axis 
ascertained by means of a solid rod according to the rules 
of Euclidean Geometry is reached when a definite measur 
ing rod, the unit rod, can be carried .c^ times from the 
origin of co-ordinates along the Xi axis. A. point having 
s t t, as the X 4 co-ordinate signifies that a unit clock 
which is adjusted to be at rest relative to the system of 
co-ordinates, and coinciding in its spatial position with the 



GENERALISED THEORY OF RELATIVITY 95 

point-event and set according to some definite standard has 
gone over .<- 4 =J periods before the occurence of the 
point-event. 

This conception of time and SIWLCC is continually present 
in the mind of the physicist, though often in an unconsci 
ous way, as is clearly recognised from the role which this 
conception has played in physical measurements. This 
conception must also appear to the reader to be lying at 
the basis of the second consideration of the last para 
graph and imparting a sense to these conceptions. But 
we wish to show that we are to abandon it aud in general 
to replace it by more general conceptions in order to be 
able to work out thoroughly the postulate of general relati 
vity, the case of special relativity appearing as a limiting 
case when there is no gravitation. 

We introduce in a space, which is free from Gravita 
tion-field, a Galiliean Co-ordinate System K (<, y, s, t,) and 
also, another system K (. y : t ) rotating uniformly rela 
tive to K. The origin of both the systems as well as their 
~-axes might continue to coincide. We will show that for 
a space-time measurement in the system K , the above 
established rules for the physical significance of time aud 
space can not be maintained. On grounds of symmetry 
it is clear that a circle round the origin in the XY plane 
of K, can also be looked upon as a circle in the plaur 
(X , Y ) of K . Let us now think of measuring the circum 
ference aud the diameter of these circles, with a unit 
measuring rod (infinitely small compared with the radius) 
and take the quotient of both the results of measurement. 
If this experiment be carried out with a measuring rod 
at rest relatively to the Galiliean system K we would ijet 
IT, as the quotient. The result of measurement with a rod 
relatively at rest as regards K would be a number which 
is greater than *. This can be seen easily when we 



96 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

regard the whole measurement-process from the system K 
and remember that the rod placed on the periphery 
suffers a Lorenz-contraction, not however when the rod 
is placed along the radius. Euclidean Geometry therefore 
does not hold for the system K ; the above fixed concep 
tions of co-ordinates which assume the validity of 
Euclidean Geometry fail with regard to the system K . 
We cannot similarly introduce in K a time corresponding to 
physical requirements, which will be shown by all similarly 
prepared clocks at rest relative to the system K . In order 
to see this we suppose that two similarly made clocks are 
arranged one at the centre and one at the periphery of 
the circle, and considered from the stationary svstem 
K. According to the well-known results of the special 
relativity theory it follows (as viewed from K) that the 
clock placed at the periphery will go slower than the 
second one which is at rest. The observer at the common 
origin of co-ordinates who is able to see the clock at the 
periphery by means of light will see the clock at the 
periphery going slower than the clock beside him. Since he 
cannot allow the velocity of light to depend explicitly upon 
the time in the way under consideration he will interpret 
his observation by saying that the clock on the periphery 
actully goes slower than the clock at the origin. He 
cannot therefore do otherwise than define time in such 
a way that the rate of going of a clock depends on its 
position. 

We therefore arrive at this result. In the general 
relativity theory time and space magnitudes cannot be so 
defined that the difference in spatial co-ordinates can be 
immediately measured by the unit-measuring rod, and time- 
like co-ordinate difference with the aid of a normal clock. 

The means hitherto at our disposal, for placing our 
co-ordinate system in the time-space continuum, in a 



GENERALISED THEORY OF RELATIVITY 97 

definite way, therefore completely fail and it appears that 
there is no other way which will enable us to fit the 
co-ordinate system to the four-dimensional world in such 
a way, that by it we can expect to get a specially simple 
formulation of the laws of Nature. So that nothing remains 
for us but to repaid all conceivable co-ordinate systems 
as equally suitable for the description of natural phenomena. 
This amounts to the following law: 

That in general, Laws of .\<if//re are expressed ly mean* of 
equations which are valid for till co-ordinal e systems, that is, 
which are covariant for all po*xi/j/<- fraasfortudtioiU. It ig 
clear that a physics which satisfies this postulate will be 
unobjectionable from the standpoint of the general 
relativity postulate. Because among all substitutions 
there are, in every case, contained those, which correspond 
to all relative motions of the co-ordinate system (in 
three dimensions). This condition of general covariance 
which takes away the last remnants of physical objectivity 
from space and time, is a natural requirement, as seen 
from the following considerations. All our icell-sntjstantiatfd 
space-time propositions amount to the determination 
of space-time coincidences. If, for example, the event 
consisted in the motion of material points, then, for this 
last case, nothing else are really observable except the 
encounters between two or more of these material points. 
The results of our measurements are nothing else than 
well-proved theorems about such coincidences of material 
points, of our measuring rods with other material points, 
coincidences between the hands of a clock, dial-marks and 
point-events occuring at the same position and at the same 
time. 

The introduction of a system of co-ordinates serves no 
other purpose than an easy description of totality of such 
coincidences. We fit to the world our space-time variables 
IS 



98 PRINCIPLE OF RKLATIVm 

(.! ./, ,u s .c 4 ) such that to any and every point-event 
corresponds a system of values of (<., .. , , 4 ). Two co 
incident point-events correspond to the same value of the 
variables (./ , .< s , r , s .: 4 ) ; i.e., the coincidence is cha 
racterised by the equality of the co-ordinates. If we now 
introduce any four functions (. l % . 3 .<- 4 ) as co 
ordinates, so that there is an unique correspondence between 
them, the equality of all the four eo-ordinates in the new 
system will still be the expression of the space-time 
coincidence of two material points. As the purpose of 
all physical laws is to allow us to remember such coinci 
dences, there is a priori no reason present, to prefer a 
certain co-ordinate system to another ; i.e., we get the 
condition of general covariance. 

$ 4. Relation of four co-ordinates to spatial and 
time-like measurements. 

Analytical expression for the Gravitation-field. 

I am not trying in this communication to deduce the 
general Relativity- theory as the simplest logical system 
possible, with a. minimum of axioms. But it is my chief 
aim to develop the theory in such a manner that the 
reader perceives the psychological naturalness of the way 
proposed, and the fundamental assumptions appear to b 
most reasonable according to the light of experience. In 
this sense, we shall now introduce the following supposition; 
that for an infinitely small four-dimensional region, the 
relativity theory is valid in the special sense when the axes 
are suitably chosen. 

The nature of acceleration of an infinitely small (posi 
tional) co-ordinate system is hereby to be so chosen, that 
the gravitational field does not appear; this is possible for 
au infinitely small region. X,, X,, X, are the apmtiaJ 



GENERALISED THEORY OP RELATIVITY 99 

co-ordinates ; X t is the corresponding time-co-ordinate 
measured by some suitable measuring clock. These co 
ordinates have, with a given orientation of the system, an 
immediate physical significance in the sense of the special 
relativity theory (when we take a rigid rod as our unit of 
measure). The expression 



had then, according to the special relativity theory, a value 
which may be obtained by space-time measurement, and 
which is independent of the orientation of the local 
co-ordinate system. Let us take /. as the magnitude of the 
line-element belonging to two infinitely near points in the 
four-dimensional region. If ds* belonging to the element 
(r/X, dX t , ^X 3 , ^X 4 ) be positive we call it with Minkowski, 
time-like, and in the contrary case space-like. 

To the line-element considered, i.e., to both the infi 
nitely near point-events belong also definite differentials 
(I < , , d< , . dx s , d \, of the four-dimensional co-ordinates of 
any chosen system of reference. If there be also a local 
system of the above kind given for the case under consi 
deration, /X s would then be represented by definite linear 
homogeneous expressions of the form 

*2) dX =2 a d.r 

V (T V<T (T 

If we substitute the expression in (1) we get 



where g will be functions of .< ^ but will no longer depend 

upon the orientation and motion of the local co-ordinates; 
for d* is a definite magnitude belonging to two point- 
events infinitely near in space and time and can be got by 



100 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

measurements with rods and clocks. The g s are here to 

be so chosen, that n = n ; the summation is to be 
"or r w 

extended over all value? of o- and r, so that the sum is to 
be extended over 4x4- terms, of which 12 are equal in 
pairs. 

From the method adopted here, the case of the usual 
relativity theory comes out when owing to the special 
behaviour of g in a finite region it is possible to choose the 

system of co-ordinates in such a way that g ^ assume* 
constant values 

f -1, 0, 0, 
0-100 



(*) 



00-10 

ooo+i 



We would afterwards sec that the choice of such a system 
of co-ordinates for a finite region is in general not possible. 

From the considerations in 2 and X it is clear, 
that from the physical stand-point the quantities g are to 

.be looked upon as magnitudes which describe the gravita 
tion-field with reference to the chosen system of axes. 
We assume firstly, that in a certain four-dimensional 
region considered, the special relativity theory is true for 
some particular choice of co-ordinates. The g & then 

have the values given in (I). A free material point moves 
with reference to such a system uniformly in a straight- 
line. If we now intro:lu3J, by u .iy substitution, the space- 
time co-ordinates .r, . ...r 4 , then in the new system g s are 

no longer constants, but functions of space and time. At 
the same time, the motion of a free point-mass in the ne.w 



GENERALISED THEORY OF RELATIVITY 



101 



co-ordinates, will appear as curvilinear, and not uniform, in 
which the law of motion, will be iwiependetd of the 
ini.fii.rr nl I In- innrJ,i<i nt<txx-])uinl*. We can thus signify this 
motion as on*- under the influence of a gravitation field. 
We see that the appearance of a gravitation-field is con 
nected with space-time variability of g s. In the general 

case, we can not by any suitable choice of axes, make 
special relativity theory valid throughout any finite region. 
We thus deduce the conception that y s describe the 

gravitational field. According to the general relativity 
theory, gravitation thus plays an exceptional role as dis 
tinguished from the others, specially the electromagnetic 
forces, in as much as the 10 functions g representing 

gravitation, define immediately the metrical properties of 
the four-dimensional region. 



MATHEMATICAL AUXILIARIES FOR ESTABLISHING THE 
GENERAL COVARIANT EQUATIONS. 

We have seen before that the general relativity-postu 
late leads to the condition that the system of equations 
for Physics, must be co-variants for arn r possible substitu 
tion of co-ordinates .- , , . , : \ve have now to see 
how such general co- variant equations can be obtained. 
\Vr shall now turn our attention to these purely mathemati 
cal pro positions. Ft will be shown that in the solution, the 
invariant ifs, given in < tjiiat.ion (:}) plays a fundamental 
role, which \vr. following (iau-Vs Theory of Surfaces, 
style as the line-element. 

The fundamental idea of the general co-variant theorv 
is this : With reference to any co-ordinate system, let 
certain tiling (tensors) be defined by a number of func 
tions of co-ordinates which are called the components of 



10? PRINCIPLE OF KKI.ATIVITY 

the tensor. There are now certain rules according to which 
the components can be calculated in a new system of 
co-ordinates, when these are known for the original 
system, and when the transformation connecting the two 
systems is known. The things herefrom designated as 
u Tensors " have further the property that the transforma 
tion equation of their components are linear and homogene 
ous ; so that all the components in the new system vanish 
if they are all zero in the original system. Thus a law 
of Nature can be formulated by puttjng all the components 
of a tensor equal to zero so that it is a general co-variant 
equation ; thus while we seek the laws of formation of 
the tensors, we also reach the means of establishing general 
co- variant laws. 

5. Contra-variant and co-variant Four-vector. 

Contra-variant Four-vector. The line-element is denned 
by the four components d.- v whose transformation law 

is expressed by the equation 

V. 

<*> " -=* T^ ",. . 

The d< ,< are expressed as linear and homogeneous func 
tion of <l> * ; we can look upon the differentials of the 

co-ordinates as the components of a tensor, which we 
designate specially as a contravariant Four-vector. Every 
thing which is defined by Four quantities A , with reference 
to a co-ordinate system, and transforms according to 
the same law, 






i.KNKKAUSBO THEORY OK RELATIVITY 103 

we may call a contra-variant Four-vector. From (5. a), 
it follows at once that the sums (A 4 B ) are also com 

ponents of a four-vector, when \ a and B T are so ; cor 
responding relations hold also for all systems afterwards 
introduced as " tensors " (Rule of addition and subtraction 
of Tensors). 

Co-r<inanf- 



We call four quantities A as the components of a co- 
variant four-vector, when for any choice of the contra- 
variant four vector B (6) ^ A B = Invm-ianL 

From this definition follows the law of transformation of 
the co-variant four-vectors. If we substitute in the right 
hand side of the equation 



the expressions 



e -v 



for B v following from the inversion of the equation (5) 
we get 



a 

B^ 5 -^ A =5 B" A 



<T _ ~ V , nO* A 



<r 

<7 



As in the above equation B CT are independent of one another 
and perfectly arbitrary, it follows that the transformation 
law is : 



104 PEINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

Remarks on the simplification <>f tl/c mode of wriliny 
the expressions. A glance at the equations of this 
paragraph will show that the indices which appear twice 
within the sign of summation [for example v in (5)] are 
those over which the summation is to be made and that 
only over the indices which appear twice. It is therefore 
possible, without loss of clearness, to leave off the summation, 
sign ; so that we introduce the rule : wherever the 
index in any term of an expression appears twice, it is to 
be summed over all of them except when it is not oxpress- 
edly said to the contrary. 

The difference between the co-variant and the contra- 
variant four- vector lies in the transformation laws [ (7) 
and (5)]. Both the quantities are tensors according to the 
above general remarks ; in it lies its significance. In 
accordance with Ricci and Levi-civita, the contravariants 
and co-variants are designated by the over and under 
indices. 

6. Tensors of the second and highei ranks. 
Contravariant tensor : If we now calculate all the Ifi 

products A^ v of the components A^ B v , of two con- 
trava riant four- vectors 

f8) A^ = A^B* 

A *", will according to (8) and (ft a) satisfy the following 
transformation law. 

6 * 8 .- 
(9) A" = 3-? g-I A"" 

We call a thing which, with reference to any reference 
system is defined by 16 quantities and fulfils the transfor 
mation relation (9), a contra variant tensor of the second 



GENERALISED THEORY OF RELATIVITY 105 

rank. Not every such tensor can be built from two four- 
vectors, (according to 8). But it is easy to show that any 

16 quantities A^ v , can be represented as the sum of A 

B v of properly chosen four pairs of four-vectors. From it, 
we can prove in the simplest way all laws which hold true 
for the tensor of the second rank defined through (9), by 
proving it only for the special tensor of the type (8). 

Contravariant Tensor of any rank : If is clear that 
corresponding to (8) and (9), we can define contravariant 
tensors of the 3rd and higher ranks, with 4 3 , etc. com- 
l>onents. Thus it is clear from (8) and (9) that in this 
sense, we can look upon contravariant four-vectors, as 
contravariant tensors of the first rank. 

Co-variant tensor, 

If ou the other hand, we take the 16 products A^ of 

the components of two co. variant four- vectors A and 



for them holds the transformation law 

Q u 8 r v 
<"> ^r =-97/67;, V 

By means of these transformation laws, the co-variant 
tensor of the second rank is defined. All re-marks which 
we have already made concerning tbe contravariaut tensors, 
hold also for co-variant tensors. 

Remark : 

It is convenient to treat the scalar Invariant either 
as a contravariant or a co-variant tensor of zero rank. 
14 



]66 HllXCIPLK OF KELATIVITV 

Mixed tensor. We can also define a tensor of the 
second rank of the type 

(12) A = A B V 

P. P- 

which is co-variant with reference to p. and contravariant 
with reference to v. Its transformation law is 



Naturally there are mixed tensors with any number of 
co- variant indices, and with any number of contra- variant 
indices. The co-variant and contra-variant tensors can be 
looked upon as special cases of mixed tensors. 



tensors : 

A contravariant or a co-variant tensor of the second 
or higher rank is called symmetrical when any two com 
ponents obtained by the mutual interchange of two indices 

are equal. The tensor A ^ or A ^ is symmetrical, when 
we have for any combination of indices 

(14) A^W 7 * 



(14a) A =A 

p.V Vfi 

It must be proved that a symmetry so defined is a property 
independent of the system of reference. It follows in fact 
from (9) remembering (14-) 

i 9 .< - 9 .T Q ,i , Q , , 

.or a- T >p.v a T /.vu. .TO- 

- e,,, e. v a,,, 8,; 



CKN Ktf ALIsKlt TIIKOllI oh II KI,.\TI VITV 107 



Anti-til iniii lri<-nl 

A contravariant or co-variant tensor of the 2nd, 3rd or 
4th rank is called <iiifi*i/nnit<>trical when the two com 
ponents got by mutually interchanging any two indices 

are equal and opposite. The tensor A. 1 *" or A ^ is thus 
antisymmetrical when we have 

(15) A^ = -A^ 



(15a) 



Of the 16 components A" , the four components A 
vanish, the rest are equal and opposite in pairs ; so that 
there are only 6 numerically different components present 
(Six-rector). 

Thus we also see that the antisymmetrical tensor 
A!*"" (3rd rank) lias only 4- components numerically 

different, and the antisymmetrioal tensor A only one. 

Symmetrical tensors of ranks higher than the fourth, do 
not exist in a continuum of 4- dimensions. 

7. Multiplication of Tensors. 

On/ft- i)ii(/(iji/n-<iti<>/i of T iix,n-x : \Vc ^ct from the 
components of a tensor of rank :, and another of a rank 
c , the components of a tensor of rank (r-fc ) for which 
we multiply all the components of the first with all the 
components of the second in pairs. Fur example, we 



108 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVIT* 

obtain the tensor T from the tensors A and B of different 
kinds : 

T = A B 

UV<T flV (T 



The proof of the tensor character of T, follows imme 
diately from the expressions (8), (10) or (12), or the 
transformation equations (9), (11), (18) ; equations (S), 
(10) and (12) are themselves examples of the outer 
multiplication of tensors of the first rank. 
Reduction in rank of a mixed Tensor. 

From every mixed tensor \ve can get a tensor which is 
two ranks lower, when we put an index of co-variant 
character equal to an index of the contravariant character 
and sum according to these indices (Reduction). We get 
for example, out of the mixed tensor of the fourth rank 

sv 

A , the mixed tensor of the second rank 



8 a8 / 

A =A =(SA 

a \ 



ft \ a aft 

and from it again by " reduction " the tensor of the zero 
rank 

.0 ./* 
A= A = A 

ft aft 

The proof that the result of reduction retains a truly 
tensorial character, follows either from the representation 



t, I NKI5AL1SK1) THKOKY OF HKLATIVITY 



109 



of tensor according to the generalisation of (1~) in combi 
nation with (H) or out of the generalisation of (13). 

Imier a<ul mixed multiplication of Tensors. 

This consists in the combination of outer multiplication 
with reduction. Examples : From the co-variant tensor of 
the seconj.1 rank A and the contravariant tensor of 

the first rank B we get by outer multiplication the 
mixed tensor 



B" 



Through reduction according to indices v and o- (i.e., put 
ting i = <r), the co-variant four vector 



D = D = A B is generated. 
/* .v /" 



These we denote as the inner product of the tensor A v 



and B . Similarly we get from the tenters A and B 

ILV 

through outer multiplication and two-fold reduction the 
inner product A B^ . Through outer multiplication 



and one-fold reduction we get out of A and B the 



mixed tensor of the second rank D = A B . \Ve 

can fitly Pall this operation a mixed one ; for it is outer 
with reference to the indices M and r t and inner with 
respect to the indices v and o-. 



110 I KI.Ni I I l.K <>! I! KI, \TIVm 

We now prove a law, which will be often applicable for 
provingthe tensor-character of certain quantities. According 

to the above representation. A B^ v is a scalar, when A 

P-V /JLV 

and B are tensors. We also remark that when A B^ is 



an invariant for everv choice of the tensor B^ v , then A 

(Of 

has a tensorial character. 

Proof : According to the above assumption, for any 
substitution we have 



A , B" = A 

OT fJiV 



From the inversion of (9) we have however 

o & o * / * / 



Substitution of this for B^" in the above equation ^i 



A 8 % 9 ^ A 

A , r - A 

" r 8 . f 8- y / 



This can be true, for any choice of B only when 
the term within the bracket vanishes. From which by 
referring to (11), the thtorem at once follows. This law 
correspondingly holds for tensors of any rank and character. 
The proof is quite similar, The law can also be put in the 

following from. If B^ and C* are any two vectors, and 



<ih\l,KAI.ISKI. THEORY OF RELATIVITY III 



if for every choice of them the inner product A B C 

is a scalar, then A is a co-variant tensor. The last 
py 

law holds even when there is the more special formulation, 
that with any arbitrary choice of the four-vector B" alone 
the scala: product A B * B v is a scalar, in which case 
we have the additional condition that A satisfies the 

symmetry condition. According to the method given 
above, we prove the tensor character of (A v + ^ v }, from 

which on Account of symmetry follows the tensor-character 
of A . This law can easily be generalized in the case of 

co-variant and contravariant tensors of any rank. 

Finally, from what has been proved, we can deduce the 
following law which can be easily generalized for any kind 

of tensor : If the qualities A B form a tensor of the 

first rank, when B is any arbitrarily chosen four-vector, 
then A v is a tensor of the second rank. If for example, 

C 1 is any four-vector, then owing to the tensor character 
of A n B 1 , the inner product A v C^ B 1 is a scalar, 

both the four-vectors C^ and B being arbitrarily chosen. 
Hence the proposition follows at once. 

A few words about the Fundamental Tensor // 

U.V 

The co-variant fundamental tensor In the invariant 
expression of the square of the linear element 

<lx- =7 df 1 1. 1 
M* /* 



112 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

A A plays the role of any arbitarily chosen contravariant 
vector, since further g y =ff v , it follows from the consi 
derations of the last paragraph that g is a symmetrical 

co-variant tensor of the second rank. We call it the 
" fundamental tensor." Afterwards we shall deduce 
some properties of this tensor, which will also be true for 
any tensor of the second rank. But the special role of the 
fundamental tensor in our Theory, which has its physical 
basis on the particularly exceptional character of gravita 
tion makes it clear that those relations are to be developed 
which will be required only in the case of the fundamental 
teusor. 

The co-variant fundamental tensor. 

If we form from the determinant scheme | g v | the 

minors of g y and divide them by the determinat ^ = j y^ \ 

we get certain quantities f* g v ^ , which as we shall 
prove generates a contra variant tensor. 

According to the well-known law of Determinants 



(16) g / a =8 

/XO" 

where S is 1, or 0, according as /* = v or not. Instead 
of the above expression for rf. 2 , we can also write 

V 6 V rf V ^ " 
or according to (16) also in the form 

0T . * 

a a a (M / 

y tt7 J VT * U. V 



GENERALISED THEORY OF RELATIVITY 



118 



Now according to the rules of multiplication, of the 
fore-going paragraph, the magnitudes 



p.<T fJL 



foims a co-variant four- vector, and in fact (on account 
of the arbitrary choice of d< ) any arbitrary four-vector. 

If we introduce it in our expression, we get 



For any choice of the vectors d d) this is scalar, and 

y*"", according to its defintibn is a symmetrical thing in a 
and r, so it follows from the above results, that g is 

contravariant tensor. Out of (16) it also follows that 8 

^ 

is a tensor which we may call the mixed fundamental 
tensor. 

Determinant of the fundamental tensor. 

According to the law of multiplication of determinants, 
we have 



On the other hand we have 



So that it follows (17) that \9 v \ I/" 



15 



114 



PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 



of ruin me. 

We see K first the transformation law for the determinant 
0= | v 1 . According to (11) 

dx 6-c 

U V 

9, 



9 = 



6,v a, v -/- 



From this by applying the law of mutiplication twice, 
we obtain. 





9*, 

F 




H- 


a ^ 

rf.r / 


V7f = 


_j* 


v-, 




" 





... (A) 



On the other hand the law of transformation of the 
volume element 



is according to the wellknown law of Jacobi. 
dtl 

dr = 



... (B) 



by multiplication of the two last equation (A) and (B) we 
get. 



(18) 



=<Sf dr ^V dr. 



lusted of v/^-, we shall afterwards introduce \/~g 
which has area! value on account of the hyperbolic character 
of the time-space continuum. The invariant ^/gdr, is 
equal in magnitude to the four-dimensional volume-element 



GENERALISED THEORY OF RELATIVITY llo 

measured with solid rods and clocks, in accordance with 
the special relativity theory. 

Remark* on the character of Hie space-time continuum 
Our assumption that in an infinitely small region the 
special relativity theory holds, leads us to conclude that ds- 
can always, according to (1) be expressed in real magni 
tudes fJX,...<JX . If we call dr a the " natural " volume 
element rfX t </X 2 dX 3 dX 4 we have thus (18a) tlr* 



Should Y/ g vanish at any point of the four-dimensional 
continuum it would signify that to a finite co-ordinate 
volume at the place corresponds an infinitely small 
" natural volume." This can never be the case ; so that g 
can never change its sign; we would, according to the special 
relativity theory assume that g has a finite negative 
value. It is a hypothesis about the physical nature of the 
continuum considered, and also a pre-established rule for 
the choice of co-ordinates. 

If however ( g) remains positive and finite, it is 
clear that the choice of co-ordinates can be so made that 
this quantity becomes equal to one. We would afterwards 
see that such a limitation of the choice of co-ordinates* 
would produce a significant simplification in expressions 
for laws of nature. 

In place of (18) it follows then simply that 

dr = d 

from this it follows, remembering the law of Jacobi, 
- =1. 



116 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

With this choice of co-ordinates, only substitutions with 
determinant 1, are allowable. 

It would however be erroneous to think that this step 
signifies a partial lenunciation of the general relativity 
postulate. We do not seek thoj=e laws of nature which are 
co- variants with regard to the Iran formations having 
the determinant 1, but we ask : what are the general 
co-variant laws of nature ? First we get the law, and then 
we simplify its expression by a special choice of the system 
of reference. 

Building up of new tensor* with the help of the fundamental 
tensor. 

Through inner, outer and mixed multiplications of a 
tensor with the fundamental tensor, tensors of other 
kinds and of other ranks can be formed. 

Example : 



We would point out specially the following combinations: 
A <f g A n 

ap 

A =g g A aft 

(complement to the, co-variant or contravariant tensors) 
and, B o Q A a 



We can call B the reduced tensor related to A 



GENERALISED THEOEY OP HELATIVITY 117 

Similarly 



,-V/AV 

B 



a/3 



It is to be remarked that f* is no other than the " com 
plement " of y v , for we have, 

ua vB S p-v 

Q Q 9 o~ 9 *> 9 
y y v J a 



9. Equation of the geodetic line 
(or of point-motion). 

At the " line element " ds is a definite magnitude in 
dependent of the co-ordinate system, we have also between 
two points P t and P 2 of a four dimensional continuum a 
line for which />/? is an extremum (geodetic line), i.e., one 
which has got a significance independent of the choice of 
co-ordinates. 

Its equation is 



(20) 



From this equation, we can in a wellknown way 
deduce 4 total differential equations which define the 
geodetic line ; this deduction is given here for the sake 
of completeness. 

Let X, be a function of the co-ordinates x v ; This 
defines a series of surfaces which cut the geodetic line 
sou^ht-for as well as all neighbourin<r lines from P, to P 3 . 
We can suppose that all such curves are given when the 
value of its co-ordinates ^ are given m terms of X. The 




118 PRINCIPLE of RELBTIVITY 

sign S corresponds to a passage from a point of the 
geodetic curve sotight-for to a point of the contiguous 
curve, both lying on the same surface A.. 
Then (20) can be replaced by 



u 



(20) 

dx dx y 

^ l ~ 9 fJiV ~(j\ ~rfX 

But 

LlL 

2 a, 



So we get by the substitution of 8w in (20a), remem 
bering that 

( ii> v ^ a 

H - /= ( 8 - i v^ 

after partial integration, 
X., 



(20b) 



J 



d\ k So; =0 
o- o- 



a. / A 



1. 1 AKIIALISED TIIEOKY OF RELATIVITY 119 

From which it follows, since the choice of 8.<- is per 
fectly arbitrary that k^ * should vanish ; Then 

(20c) k a =0 (o-=l, 2, 3, 4) 

are the equations of geodetic line ; since along the 
geodetic line considered we have ^,<?=/=0, we can choose the 
parameter A, as the length of the arc measured along the 
geodetic line. Then w = l, and we would get in place of 
(20c) 



V 8** 8.<- 8* 8* 

<r 

_i a v 8 V ar - _ 

Or by merely changing the notation suitably, 

<ZV _ _ (L- (ft 

(20d) g a(f t - a -4- K" -^ . ~ =0 

where we have put, following Christoffel, 

(9i\ F/ xv l * I M "^ vcr P- v ~\ 

S a* a~~ ~ ~ai 

LO- J L O v fi 

Multiply finally (20d) with 0* (outer multiplication with 
reference to T, and inner with respect to rr) we get at 
last the final form of the equation of the geodetic line 



- 

ds* 
Here we have put, following Christoffel, 



120 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

10. Formation of Tensors through Differentiation. 

Relying on the equation of the geodetic line, we can 
now easily deduce laws according to which new tensors can 
be formed from given tensors by differentiation. For this 
purpose, we would first establish the general co-variant 
differential equations. We achieve this through a repeated 
application of the following simple law. If a pertain 
curve be given in our continuum whose points are character 
ised by the arc-distances s. measured from a fixed point on 
the curve, and if further <, be an invariant space function, 

then is also an invariant. The proof follows from 
the fact that d<j> as well as ds, are both invariants 

Since = 9* |> 
ds Qx 9 * 

a , d. 
so that i = 5^ . is also an invariant for all curves 



which go out from a point in the continuum, i.e., for 
any choice o] 

diately that. 



any choice of the vector d c . From which follows imme 
/* 



A =1* 

. Vj 

is a co-variant four-vector (gradient of <). 

According to our law, the differential-quotient x= 
taken along any curve is likewise an invariant 
Substituting the value of iff, we get 

d- dr. d** 
O <P /* v . o <P A 4 
v= r 7^ . ^ . + 

A Q., 9, d* d 9- 

M * f 1 



<;F.\K1UUSK1> THKOKY OJ- HKL.Vl mTY 

Here however we cannot at once deduce the existence 
of any tensor It we however tiikc that the curves along 
which we are differentiating are geodesies, we pet from it 

dfx 

by replacing -- - according to ( 4 J J 



= r aa ^_ - ^ v) -9* 

I 3* 9- v <- r > 9- T 






From the interrliangeability of the differentiation with 
regard to ^ and v, and also according to (2o) and (21 ) svc iin- 

\ M 1 J 
that tlie bracket - is symmetrical with respect to u. 

( T ) 
and t-. 



As we can draw ;t uvoilrt ic line in any direction from any 
point in the continuum. x is thus a four-vector, with an 

arbitrary ratio of components. M that it follows from Mir 
results of 7 that 

(25) 

is a co- variant tensor of the second rank. We have thus got 
the result that out of the co-variant tensor ot the tirst rank 

A = "-^ we can get I>V differentiation a co-\ariant tensor 
of 2nd rank 



V= 6/ 
16 



\:l l PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVriY 

W> call rhe tensor A the " extension " >f the tensor 
ta> 

A . Then we can easily show that this combination also 
leads to a. tensor, when the vector A is not repvesentable 
us a gradient. In order to see this we first remark that 
\^ ~~ is a co-variant four-vector when \L and < are 



scalars. This i> uiso the case for a sum of four such 

terms : 



when i/rd), <j>( l )...\f/(*) <(*) are scalar*. Now it is however 
clear that every co-variant four-vector is j-epresentable in 

the form of S 
P- 

If for example, A is a fonr- vector whose components 
are any given functions of x , we have, (with reference to 
the chosen co-ordinate system) only to pat 



= A, 



in order to arrive at the result that S is equal to A . 

V- P 

In order to prove then that A in a tensor when on the 
right side of (26 N t we substitute any co-variant four-vector 
for A we have only to show that this is true for the 



Til ROll Y OF BRLATIVITY 1: 

four- vector S . For this latter, case, howevtjr, a glance on 

the right hand side of (26) will nhow that we have only to 
bring forth the proof for the case when 



Now the right hand side of (25) multiplied by i/ is 



which has a tensor character. Similarly, ~* f * is 



also a tensor (outer product of two four- vectors). 
Through addition follows the tensor character of 



Thus we get the desired proof for the four-vector, 

S l 

\1/ - and hence f->r any four- vectors A as shown above. 



With the help of the extension of the four- vector, we 
can easily define extension of a co-variant tensor of any 
i-ank. This is a generalisation of the extension of the four- 
vector. We confine ourselves to the case of the extension 
of the tensors of the 2nd rank for which the law of for 
mation can be clearly seen. 

Aft already remarked every co-variant tensor of th^ 2nd 
rank can be represented as a sum of the tensors of the type 
A B . 

fi V 



124 PRINCIPLE OF EELATIVITY 

It would therefore be sufficient to deduce the expression 
of extension, for one such special tensor. According to 
(26) we have the expressions 



8 A ( ) 

9 ^ - ( r ) ^ 



are tensors. Through outer multiplication of the first 
with B and the 2nd -with A we get tensors of the 

third rank. Their addition gives the tensor of the third 
rank 



A - /xv - A - J av A 

V" srr 



where A y is put=A B^, . The right hand side of (27) 
is linear and homogeneous with reference to A . and its 

first differential co-efficient so that this law of formation leads 
to a tensor not only in the case of a tensor of the type A 

B but also in the case of a summation for all such 

tensors, i.e.., in the case of any co-variant tensor of the 

second rank. We call A the extension of the tensor A . 
p.va /iv 

It is clear that (26) and (24) are only special cases of 
(27) (extension of the tensors of the tirst and zero rank). 
In general we can get all specinl Ijtws of formation of 
tensors from (27) combined with tensor multiplication. 



(JKXKH.M.ISKD TUKOliY Ol KKLAT1V1KY 125 

Some special cases of Particular Importance. 

A f -ic inuiJiai n It miiia* con<:rr,iui<i lite fundamental 
tn*< ,-. W<> shall first deduce some of tin- h-mnms much xised 
ut fci -\\ards. According to the law of differentiation uf 
determinants, we have 

28) ,, 9 = /V^ v =-f/ /xv ^/ V - 

Tlu- la.-t foi-ni follows From tho first when we remember 

that 



,/ ,f v = ti L , and there fun- ,-/ g fa = 

ULV U.V 



consequently;/ fly** 1 + >j^ v <l<i 



From (28), it folhnvn that 

~t i ^ (-r/) _,,/ V 
6. -^ 6,, 



/" 6- 



Again, since ^ / <j ^ , we havi-, Ity differentiation, 



vcr 

(/ 



a,-. 



(30) - 01 



By mixed multiplication with (j nnd ;/ 
we obtain (Hwn^inir the mode of wntinir the 



126 I KINTIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

Id ftv =- P a < V P d< 
(31) 

Q7~ ~ ;/ ^ V a/S 

I 



V 

p.- p.w K^, 

(32) 



, 



Tlio expression (31) allows a transformation which we 
shall often use ; according to (21) 



If we substitute this in the second of the foi-mula (31). 
we get, remembering (23). 



By substituting the right-hand side of (H4) in (29), we 
get 



.lsKM TUKOKV OF KEI.AT1VIIV I" ? 

nf ///> eo^tfavoriani four^vcctor, 
Let u> multiply i ii ) with the conttavariani fandanumta] 
ten-Mir if (inner mult ijilicittion ). then lv ;t 



of the firnt incjn^ci 1 . th ritrlit-lianrl side tnkes the form 



; , a _ V r . 

8 8 - 



According to (. U ) ;nul (- .*). th lust member cun 
the form 



Both the first members of the exj)rcssion (B), and the 
second member of the expression (A) cancel each other. 
since the naming of the summation-indices i immaterial. 
The laHt meiuhei- of (B; cun then he united with first of 
(A). If we put 



where A* as well as A are vectors which -an be trbi- 
M 

trarily chosen, we obtain finally 



9 



-" A " 



a 

This scalar is the Di vcrym- ut the contra variant four- 
vector A V , 



128 I lUM ll i.l. OK UKLATTVITY 

ttnfdiin,/ a/ t/tc (covarianfy fjouyvectof, 

Tin- seron.l iiHMiiiifi in :!> ) iv -\ mmetrical in the indict 

u, and v. Hence A A is an antisymmetrical tensor 
/ f p.* vp. 

built up iu a vrry simple niainier. \Ve ol)tain 

a A 9 A 

(36) B = - /x - 



t>f ii Six-vector. 

Jf we apply the operation ( 27) on an nntisynimetrical 

tensor of tht- sri-ond I jink A . ;uid form all the equations 
pr 

arising from the cyclic* interchange of the indices /x, v. <r, and 
add all them, we obtain a tensor of thr third rank 

a A 

(.37) B =A 4- A + A = - ^ 

/Aj ir fiver V<TJJ. ir/j.v Q <T 



from which it is easy to see that the tensor is antisymmetri- 
eal. 

<-/> nf tfir S 



If (27) is multiplied by <^ f] V ( mixed multiplicjition), 
then a tensor is obtained. Tho tirst member of the right 
hand side of (27) can be written in the form 



6 A 

a, (r 



t.t \i I;M.ISI;D TIIKOUY <>i if KMTI\ 1 1 \ J:><) 

If we rc,d:iee /" / ^.\ I v A"^. /" v ^ A hy 

/"<r , r / M J 

A and rojthicc in llic ti-insforiiind first inoinliop 

^ /i ,,,,, 9-""" 
9", 9-V 

with tlio help of (^M-), then from tlie right-hand side of (27) 
t here arises ;xn expression with seven terms, of which four 
t-ancel. 1 here remnifis 



This is the expression for the ext elision of n contra variant 
of the second rank : extensions can also he formed I m 
em-responding cont ravariant tensors of higher and lower 
ranks. 

We remark that in the same way. we can also form the 
extension of a mixed tensor A 

9A " i, ,) (, r) 

(:> :h A ~ ~ V + / A 

15\ the reduction of (US) with reference to the indices 

^tr v 
/i -tnd tr ( inner multiplication with I , we tret a con- 

V ft / 

t ravariant four- vector 



9 
17 



I uixrii i.i: OK in;i, \TI\ITY 



v of - with 



On tlu 1 ;iccouiit of flic svmiiirtrv 

( " ) 
reference to the indices (3. and K. the third member of tht 

right hand side vanishes when A u " is an antisymrnetrical 
tensor, which we assume here ; the second member can be 
transformed according to (29a) ; we therefore get 



A a _ i o I v a j 

(4) : 7^~~8^7 

p 



This is the expression of the divergence of a oontra- 
variant six-vector. 



of t//f t//ic<:il ti /i.wr of i/ie second rank. 
Let us form the reduction of (89) with reference to the 
indices a and <r, we obtain remembering (29;i) 



If we introduce into the last term the contravnriant 
tensor A p<r = r/^ T A , it takes the form 

T 

-[">- A-. 

L ^ J 

If further A^* 7 is symmetrical it is reduced t<> 



(,l \ I i; M.IM.D Til K( in u| UK I \TI \ IT1 1 > i 

If instead <>i A: . introduce in ;i >imilar way the 
symmetrical co-variant tensor A ^ g a </ A" . then 
owing to (31) the last member can take the form 



-,j A 

J 8 r f*r 



In the symmetrical case treated, (41) can be replaced by 
-it her of the forms 



I In. 



( /-j A ) 





which we snail have to make use of afterwards. 

$12. The Riemann-Christoffel Tensor. 
\Ve now seek only those tensors, which can be 
obtained from the fundamental tensor ^ \by differentiation 
alone. It is found ea-il\ . Wo ]>ut in (27) instead of 
i- A " tin- fundamental t-nsor // " and i^et from 



IW PIMNCIPU. 01 l!i;i.\Tl\ m 

it a new tensor, namely the extension of the fundamental 
tensor. We can easily convince ourselves that this 
vanishes identically. We prove it in the following way; we 
substitute in (27) 

8 A (^ 

[IV Q j: / \ P 

f r (^p J 

i.e., the extension of a four- vector. 

Thus we get (by slightly changing the indices) the 
tensor of the third rank 

^ _ / _ ) r P _ y T r p _ \ (TT f _p 

/xtrr a . -a- / ija, - " ; (a- ) n ( a..- 



6, 



W r e use these expressions for the formation of the ten>ur 
A A . Thereby the following terms in A 

/AOT I>.T(T fJ(TT 

cancel the corresponding terms in A ^; the iirst member, 
the fourth member, as well as the member corresponding 
to tlie last term within the square bracket. These are all 
symmetrical in <r, and T. The same is true for the sum of 
the second and third members. We thus get 

A - A = tt p A . 

/iOT /ATO" fJUTT p 



/HOT 




I.I.M.I; \i.i>i.n TIII:OI;N or UKi,ATi\rn 



The essential thing in this result is that on the 
right hand nde of ( 1:2) we have only A , but not its 

differential C0refficientf. From the tensor-character of A 

fi(TT 

A , and from the fact that A is an arbitrary four 

flTO- p 

vector, it follows, on account of the result of 7, that 
B is a tensor (Kiemann-Christoffel Tensor). 

fUTT 

The mathematical significance of this tensor is as 
follows; when the continuum is so shaped, that there is a 
co-ordinate system for which y s are constants, B p all 

[1.V /XCTT 

vanish. 

If \ve choose instead of the original co-ordinate system 
any new one, so would the </ s referred to this last system 

be no longer constants. The tensor character of B 

/XCTT 

shows us, however, that these components vanish collectively 
also in any other chosen system of reference. The 
vanishing of the Kiemann Tensor is thus a necessary con 
dition that for -some choice of the axis-system y V can be 
taken a> constant^ In our problem it corresponds to the 
case when by a suitable choice of the co-ordinate system, 
the special relativity theory holds throughout any finite 
region. By the reduction of (1-3) with reference to indicc> 
to r and p, we get the covarinnt tensor of the second rank 




1- J1- ] iu.\( ii i.i; 01 KI.I. nivrn 



ti/io/t I In- c/io/ce o/ co-ordinoti-cs. It has alrcadv 
been remarked in 8, with reference to the equation (18a), 
that the co-ordinates can with advantage be so choseu that 
x/ = ! A glance at the equations got in the last two 
paragraphs shows that, through such a choice, the law of 
formation of the tensors suffers a significant simplifica 
tion. It is specially true for the tensor B , which plays 
a fundamental role in the theory. By this simplifica 
tion, S vanishes of itself so that tensor B reduces to 

/it fJLV 

R . 

/J.V 

I shall give in the following pages all relations in the 
simplified form, with the above-named specialisation of 
the co-ordinates. It is then very easy to go back to the 
general covariant equations, if it appears desirable in 
any special case. 



C. THE THEORY OF THE GRAVITATION-FIELD 

13. Equation of motion of a material point in a 
gravitation-field. Expression for the field-components 
of gravitation. 

A freelv moving body not acted on by external torcr- 
moves, according to the special relativity theory, along a 
straight line and uniformly. This also holds for the 
generalised relativity theory for any part of the four-dimen 
sional region, in which the co-ordinates K,, can be, and 
are, so chosen that // s have special constant values of 
the expression (4). 

Let us discuss this motion from the stand-point of any 
arbitrary co-ordinal O-M -stem K ; : it moves with reference to 
K, (as explained in 2) in a gravitational field. The la\\> 



(ii:\KI! M.ISKD THEORY (>K It Kl. \TI \ m 



1:55 



of motion With reference to K, follow easily from the 
following consideration. \Yith reference to K,,, the law 

of motion is a four-dimenfcional straight lino and tlm* a 
geodesic 1 . As a geodetic-line is defined independently 

of the system of oo-ordinates, it would also be the law of 
motion for the motion of the material-point with reference 
to K! ; If we put 



v = - T ^ 

we get tho motion of the point with reference to K 
jjiven by 



J if. ./ dx 

__ T =r T /( 

,/X " / l /s- </> 



\\ e now make the very simplo assumption that this 
general oovariant system oi equations defines also the 
motion of the point in the gravitational Held, when there 
exists no reference-system K,,, with reference to which 
the special relativity theory holds throughout a finite 
region. The assumption seems to us to be all the more 
legitimate, as (1(5) contains only the first differentials of 
// , among which there is no relation in the special case 
when K,, exists. 

If r T s vanish, the point moves uniformlv and in a 

/*" 

straight line; these magnitudes therefore determine the 
deviation from uniformity. They are the components of 
the gravitational field. 



l- iC) I HI.M IIM.I. ol Kill. \Tlvm 

14. The Field-equation of Gravitation in the 
absence of matter. 

In the following, we differentiate gravitation-field from 

matter in the sense that everything besides the gravita 
tion-field will be signified :is matter : therefore the term 
includes not only matter in the usual sense, but also the 
electro-dynamic field. Our next problem is to seek the 
Reid-equations of gravitation in the absence of matter. For 
this we apply the same method as employed in the fore 
going paragraph for the deduction of the equations of 
motion for material points. A special case in which the 
field-equations sought-for are evidently satisfied is that of 
the special relativity theory in which </ s have certain 

constant values. This would be the case in a certain 
finite region with reference to a definite co-ordinate 
>vstem K,,. With reference to this system, all the com 
ponents B /J of the Riemann s Tensor ("equation \:> 

vanish. These vanish then also in the region considered. 
with reference to every other co-ordinate system. 

The equations of the gravitation-field free from matter 

must thus be in everv case satisfied when all B^ vanish. 

P.<TT 

But this condition is clearly one which goes too far. For 
it is clear that the gravitation-field generated by a material 
point in its own neighbourhood can never be transformed 
,111;, t/ by any olioiiv of a\-s, i.e., it cannot be transformed 
to a case of constant ft s. 

Therefore it i> clear that, for a gravitational field free 
from matter, it is desirable that the symmetrical ten- 

BOW H deduced from the tensors 1^ should vanish. 

.v r- 



B ILI8! I) TIIF.oin Hi i!i:r. \TI\m 137 

\\ethu-iget 1 (I equations for 1 quantities // which are 
fulfilled in the special case when IV V all vanish. 

Remembering ( I I) we see that in absence of matter 
the field-equations come out as follows ; (when referred 
to ihe special co-ordinate-system chosen.) 



er; " 



It fan also he shown that the ohoiee of these equa 
tions is connected with a minimum of arbitrariness. For 

liesides l> , there is no tensor of the second rank, which 

/" 

can lie built out of // s and their derivatives no higher 
/" 

than the second, and which is also linear in them. 

It will be shown that the equations arising in a, purely 
mathematical wa\ out of the conditions of the general 
relativity, together with equations (Hi), givo us the Xe\\- 
loman law of attraction as a tirst approximation, and lead 
in the second approximation t<> the explanation of the 
perihelion-motion of mercury diseovertd by Leverrier 
(the residual ellect which could not be accounted for by 
the consideration of all sorts of disturbing factors). My 
view is that these are convincing proofs of the physical 
cornctne-s i.f my theory. 



l- i s I Hl N CIIT.I. Or I!K1. \TIVITV 

vH5. Hamiltonian Function for the Gravitation-field. 
Laws of Impulse and Energy. 

In order to show that the field equations correspond to 
the laws of impulse ;uid energy, it is most convenient to 
write it in the following Hamiltonian form : 



f f 

| 8 I Hdr=o 



Here the variations vanish at the limits of the finite 
four-dimensional integration-space considered. 

It is first necessary to show that the form (47 n) is 
equivalent to equations (47). For this purpose, I.-t us 

consider H as a function of f and <f v ( ::. > 
We have at I list 



, 9^, A , 9 ",,A _ 9 ,, 

\ 3, 6- 3 S 



<.i MI; \Usi.u TIIKOIIS DI IM-.I. \II\IM 1 ) 

The terms arising out of the two last terms within tin- 
bracket are of different si^ris, ami change into one 
another bv the interchange of the indices /* and ft. They 
cancel each other in the expression forSH, when they are 
multiplied by f , which is symmetrical with respect to 
fj and ft, so that only the first member of the bracket 
remains for our consideration. Remembering ( 31), we 
thus have : 

ftft ra i> ft a 

Therefore 

f 9H r r ft 

uv~ f*P i 

! 9 f 

(48) 8H r ,r 

[ 9. /r 

If we now cam out thr \ariation> in ( IJa), we obtain 

the system of equations 

/ 

a / an v an 

(^ h ) o , ( , ) - , =<>. 

O ,< v ~ ii r I -> // r 

a o , / O f/ 

which, nwinir to the relation.- (|s\ eoineide with (1-7), 
as was rr(|iiired to be proved. 

If (47b) is multiplied by / . 



14-0 i JM.NTII l.l. (M KM, \TIVm 

aud consequently 

r a / an { a / / 9" 

< r a.- V .,// a.-;. V " a 



we obtain the equation 

_a_ 
a.* 



8H 



37. 



L ** 

Owinsr to the relations (48), the equations (4?) and (:>4). 

fjifh /" A ,,/"V a r-/^ 



It is to be noticed that f L is not a tensor, so that (lie 
<r 

<iuatioii (4 9) holds only for systems t or which \ ,/ = ]. 
This equation expresses tin- laws of conservation of i in pulse 
and energy in -ravitation-field. In fact, the inte-ra- 
tiou of this equation over ;i tlncc-dimcnsional vohnne V 
leads to the four equations 



(40a) 



r 



(I] \l.|i \I.1M-.I 1 MKollV (H- IJKI.ATI VITY 

where <> , , >i .. , ., are the direction-cosines <>F the inward- 
drawn normal to the -urFaee-elemeut i/S in the Kuclidean 
Sense. \V- reco^ni-e iii this the usual expression For the 
laws ol conservation. \\ e denote the ma^nituiles I ^ as the 
energy-components oF the gravitation-field. 

I will now put the equation (1-7) in a third Form which 
will be ver\ -erviceable For a quick realisation of our object. 
By multiplxiii" 1 the field-equations (17) with <j r , these are 
obtained in the mixed Forms. IF we remember that 

,.< a r ;.__ 6 , a/" 

9 ,._ -a., V r f)" a r /- 

which ownm to (:U) is equal to 

^a ( rr i>" ] " /r ^ r ^ 

- v r/ V r" 

or slight ly altering the notation equal to 

6 



The third member oF tin- expression cancel with the 
second member of the field-equations (17V In place oF 
the second term of this r\pre><ion. we ran, on account oF 
the relations (")H\ put 



( " - 1 A r f \ . 
V / -j / 



I ll I XUI I.K OK I!M.\ | |\ rn 

Therefore in UK- place of the equations (17), wo obtain 



a 



^16. General formulation of the field-equation 
of Gravitation. 

The lield-e<|uations established in the preceding para- 
graph for spaces free from matter is to be compared with 
the equation V - <=" of the Newtonian theorv. We have 
now to find the equations which will correspond to 
Poisson s Equation V 2 <j!> = ^7r^. (/, signifies the density of 
matter) . 

The special relativity theorv has led to the conception 
that the inertial mass (Triige Masse) is no other than 
energy. It can also be fully expressed mathematically by 
a symmetrical tensor of the. second rank, the energy-tensor. 
We have therefore to introduce in our generalised theory 

energy-tensor ~Y a associated with matter, which like the 
energy components 1 ir of (he gravitation-field (equal ion-. 

10, and ")()) have a mixeil character but which however can 
be connected with synimetrieal eovariant tensors. The 
equation (")!) teaches us how to introduce the energy-tensor 
(corresponding to tin density of 1 oisson s equation) in the 
field e|iiatioiis of gravitation. If we consider a complete 
system (for example the Sular->\ stem its total ina^-. a- 
aiso it> total i;ra\ itatin^ action, v.ill depend on the total 
.neiL, r \ of the system, ponderable as well a> ^ravitat ional. 



CKVI .I; VI.KKD TIIKOUY or KKI. \Ti\m l-l-"- 



\ \\\> can !>< expi (s>cil, hv putting in (")!), in place of 
energy-components / ct gravitation-field alone the ^um 
of I hi- energy-components of matter and gravitation, i.e., 



\Ye thus i;et instead of (51), the teiisor-pijnation 



where T T 1 " (Laife s Sealar^. The<- ;nv tin- general tiehl- 

M 

e(|tialions i)l gravitation in the mixed form. In plaei of 
(47), we Ljet.ltv working l);iekvvards the svstem 



It must be admitted, that this introduction of the 
rLT\ -tensor of matter cannot he justified l>\ means of the 
Relativity- Postulate alone; for we have in the fore^oin^- 
analysis deduced it from the condition that the ner-\ of 
the gravitation-field should exert gravitating action in the 
same \\a\- a- every other kind of energy. The stroii^e-! 
ground foi the choice id the al ove eijiiilion however lies in 
this, that they lead, as their <-..iisri|iirnce>, to equations 
--IIIL; the eon>crvatioM of the comjioneiit > of total 
energy (the ini|iul>e- and the ciieru\ which \aetly 
correspond to the e.|iiati"ii- (I! ) and i M a . This shall lie 
shown afterward- 



1 t I IMMXrlN.h. i| i;i.I, \T| VITY 

vj 17. The laws of conservation in the general case. 

The equations (5:2) can be easily so transformed that 
the second member on the right-band side vanishes. \\ c 
reduce (or!) with reference to the indices p- and o- and 
subtract the equation so obtained after multiplication with 
.1 ^ from (5-2). 

AYe obtain. 



we i>|)eratc on il l>y ,., . Now. 



9 . 9 V 



. r * """( "> 

2 8... 6. .. L P V 8*, 



u rr 



I lic t nst and the third member of the round bracket 
lead to t .\]ifc>sions which cancel one another. a> can be 
eusilv >e-n by interchaii-in- the -nmniation-indices u, and 
,r. on the one hand, and ft and A. on the other. 



! i; u.is|.-.|i TiiKui,^ in 1:1:1. \Ti\rn ll. t 

The M cond term c;in be transformed according to (>!). 
Sr, that u,. et 



_ 

- - a . a^ a. v 

The second member of the t-xprcssioii on the Ifi t-liand 
-idr of ("):2a) leads first to 



1 a 1 / ,//* 

2 a. a.r I f/ 



, (/ 

a--, a, a 



+ a.. 



The exprerokm arising ont of the last incmlicr \\-itliin 
the round brackel vanishes ftcooiding to ( % 29) on aooonnt 

of tlic flioiot- of axes. The two others can l>e taken 
ton-ether and ni\r u> on account of ( >!), the rxpression 



So that reroetnbering (">!) we li 

a, 9 ^a, (^- 

i ^<r A/^ ,_ \ 

V r w ) ** 

identical I v. 
19 



1 1C, I lilN rUM.r. ()! ItKI. \TIYI I Y 

I Yoni (5.)) jind (~>:l-,i} i! follows I hat 



From the field equations of gravitation, it also follows 
that the conservation-laws of impulse and energy are 
satisfied. \Ve see it most simply following the >atne 
reasoning which lead to equations (I .hi); onlv instead of 
the energy-components of the gravitational-field, we are to 
introduce the total energy-components of matter and gravi 
tational field. 

18. The Impulse-energy law for matter as a 
consequence of the field-equations. 

8 ^ 
If we multiply (5-5) with . we L;-et ill a w;iv 

(T 

similar to 15, remembering that 

a/ 1 

:/,. =H vanishes, 



a/" ~ ^ 

the equations I" =_ 

8 8.. /" 



or remembering (:>(>) 

(57) g-/ : + : fV= 

4 comparison with (Ml>) shows that these equations 
Pof the above choice of co-onlinates ( x ,/ = 1) asserts 
nothiiiLl hut the vanishing of the di\eruence .if the tensor 
(jf the eiier^ v-coiiiponents ul matlei. 



(. K\ i i; \ i.isi- D IIII.OIM ni KI;I, \n\iTY 117 

IMivsieallv the appearance of the second term on the 
left-hand >ide shows that for matter alone the law of con- 

iervation of impulse and energy cannot hold; or can only 

hold when g^ a are eon>tants ; i.e., when the tield of gravi 
tation vanishes. The second memhei i> ;in e\|H .^-ion for 

impulse and euergj whic!ithe gravitation-field exe:ls pel- 
time and per volume upon matter. This comes out clearer 
when instead of (57 we write it in the Form of (17). 

9 C- a 

9 ; =-r: f i ^ 

The ri-ht-liand side expresses the interaction of the energy 
of the gravitatioiiftl-iifld on matter. The field-equations of 
gravitation contain thus at the same time I conditions 

which are to be satisfied by all material phenomena. We 

^{ the ei|iiations of the material phenomena completely 
when the latter i> characterix-d In four other differential 
equation;- independent of one another. 

D THE MATERIAL" PHENOMENA. 

The Mathematical auxiliaries developed under H ! at 
once enal)ie> u> to ^cnei-ali-e, according to the generalised 
theor\ of relativitx, the physical law> of matter (Hydrody- 
namies, Maxwell s I llectro-dynainies a> the\ lie already 
formulated according to the special-retain ity-theory. 
The generalised Kelativitx Principle leads us to no further 
limitation of po->il>ilitics ; hut it eiiahles u> to know 
exactly the influence of gravitation on all processes with 
out the introduction of any new hypothesis. 

It is owinii to tins, that as regard- the physical nature 
of matter 1,111 a narrou >en>e) :.o delinitt iie:-e--ar\ anni|i- 
tion> are to he introduced. The i|ite-tioii ma\ he open 



I I s i i; IN (i i !,!; (>! i;i<;r,\TiviTY 

whether the theories of the clectro-maguetic field and the 
gravitational-field together, will Jonn a sufficient basis for 
the theory of matter. The general relativity jo$tulate can 
teach us no new principle. But by building up tin- 
theory it must be shown whether electro-magnetism and 
gravitation together can achieve what the former alone 
did not succeed in doin<r. 



19. Euler s equations for frictionless adiabatic 
liquid. 

Let // and p, be two scalars, of which the first denotes 
the pressure and the last the density of the fluid ; between 
them there is a relation. Let the eontrawriant symmetrical 

tensor 

,j ,j il.r / /) 

ff 



be the contra-variant energy -tensor of the liquid. To it 
also belongs the covarianl tensor 



/ /i + / , / ,, ,- p 

fir i><> ,/.. fl> ,/> 



> well a> the mixed tensor 



It we put the ri^ht-liand side ol ^OSb) in i^j/a) we 
^t t the ^eiieriil h\ drod\ ii;iinical ei|iialiuns of Kuler accord 
ing tn the g --ne raided relativity theory. This in \>\ inciplc 
Completely solves the problem of motion: for the four 



i,KNKKAI,IM ,l> I lltdin 01 IJKI.A I l\ ITV II 1 . 



equations (.")?a) together \vitli the ^iveii equation between 
// and f >, and the equation 



./ p - 1 

V ,ls ,/* 



are Millieient, with the ^iven values of y ,,, for finding 
out the six unknowns 

(/X I/S l If l/S 

If // s are unknown we have also to take the equ- 
tions (*)-i). There are now 11 equations for rinding out 
10 functions // , so that the number is more than sufii- 
cient. Now it is be noticed that the equation (o?a) is 
already contained in ("> $), so that the latter only represents 
(7) independent equations. This indeliniteness is due to 
the wide freedom in the choice of co-ordinates, so that 
mathematically the problem is indefinite in the sense that 
of the gpace-fuuetiona can be arbitrarily chosen. 



$20. Maxwell s Electro-Magnetic field- equations. 

Let <f> be the components of a covariant four-vector. 
the electro-tnagnetic potential ; from it let iis form accord 
ing to (. US) the components I- ul the eovariant >i \-vector 
of the electro-magnetic field aeeordin^- \<> the >\>tem of 






J50 i-ui \CIPI.K oi I;KI, \TI\ITV 

From (") .), it follows that the system ol equations 



9F 



9 F, 

a< 



is satisfied of which the left-hand side, according to 
(o?), is MM anti-s\ mmetrical tensor of the third kind. 
This system (HO) contains essentially four equations, which 
can be thus written : 



((lOa) 



a-. 



This system of eqaatioDfl correeponds to the second 
system of equations of Maxwell. \Ve see it at once if we 
put 

( I Y, = II, ! ,< = K, 



Instead of (OOa) we can therefore write according to 
the usual notation of three-dimensional vector-analysis: 



an 

a/ 



.it K=( 



div 1I=, 



OBNERALTABD TIITOIM or RBT*ATIVIT\ 1 > I 

The litst Maxwellian system is obtained by a genera - 
lisation of the t onn n iven liy Miukowski. 



\Ve introduce the (-out ra-variant six-vector 1 \ 

P 

tin- f|iu(i()n 



and also a contra-variant four-vector .l / , \\liicli is the 
electrical current-deusitv in vacuum. Then remembering 
(40) we can establish the system of equations, which 
remains invariant for any substitution with determinant I 
g to our choice of co-ordinates). 



It we put 



, I 11 = H ., K" = } /. 

(I ) 



F" = H K S1 = - M 

which iuantities become e(|iial to II, . !] in the ra>e of 
the special relativity theory, and besides 



.1 = 
we Gjet instead of ((> $) 

r 



= P 



,-ot H - = * 

a/ 



152 NMxni i.i: or 1:1:1. \TI VITY 

The p(|uations (( ()). ((>:!) and (<>.">) give ihus a generali 
sation of Maxwell s field-equations in vacuum, which 
remains true iti our chosen system of co-ordinates. 

T/ti energy-components <>/ I In- electTO-ntttffneftc fi /<I . 

Let us form 1 he inner-product 

>:>) K = K -I . 

,<r <TJ> 

According to (01) its components ean l>e written down 
in the three-dimensional notation. 



/. H]. 



(. K 
K is a eovariant four-vector whose components are equal 

cr 

to the negative impulse and energy which are transferred 
to ill" electro-magnetic field per unit oi time, and per unit 
of volume, bv the electrical masses. If the electrical 
masses be free, that is, under the influence of the electro 
magnetic field onlv, then the eovariant four-vector 
K will vanish. 

(T 

In order to get the energy components T of the elec 
tro-magnetic field, we require only to give to the equation 
K o, the form of the equation (">7). 

(T 

From (! }) and ((>">) we get first, 



6 ,, ,,, W <" 9 " 

a, ( v e 



riE.VElMUSED THKORY OF RELATIVITY 1 53 

On account f (60) the second member on the right-hand 
side admits of the transformation 



ft V 



to symmetry, this expression can also be written in 
the form 



which can also be put in the form 

1 9 .< \ ll ft /* / 

+ F ft F 2 ( ^ l Vft } 
a p ^ v 6 V 



The first of these terms r-:m be written short lv :i-~ 



:in I the second after difl erentiation can be transformed in 
the form 



154 NM\( I I Li: ul 

11 we take all the throe terms together, we get the 
relation 



< 



where 

(<Hk) T"=- F F v " + \ 8 1 F 



(Td 





a/? 



On account of (30) the equation (66) become? equivalent 
to (57) and (57a) when K vanishes. Thus T s are the 
energy -components of the electro-magnetic field. With 
the help of (61) and (64) we can easily show that the 
energy -components of the electro-magnetic field, in the case 
of the special relativity theory, give rise to the well-known 
Maxwell-Poynting expressions. 

We have now deduced the most general laws which 
the gravitation-field and matter satisfy when we use a 
co-ordinate system for which \/ . / = 1- Thereby we 
achieve an important simplification in all our formulas and 
calculations, without renouncing the conditions of general 
covariance, as we have obtained the equations through a 
specialisation of the co-ordinate system from the general 
C O variant-equations. Still the question is not without formal 
interest, whether, when the energy-components of the 
gravitation-Held and matter is defined in a generalised manner 
without any specialisation of co-ordinates, the laws of con 
servation have the form of the equation (06), and the field- 
equations of gravitation hold in the form (52) or (52a) ; 
such that on the left-hand side, we have a divergence in the 
usual sense, and on the right-hand side, the sum of the 
energy-components of matter and gravitation. J have 



tiBNfcK \USKH TIIMilM (>! KKLATIVm I -V) 

found out thai this is indeed the ease, lint I am of opinion 
that the eominnnicat ion of my rather comprehensive work- 
on this subject will not pay, for nothing essentially ne\\ 
conies out of it. 



E. $21. Newton s theory as a first approximation. 

We have already mentioned several times that, the 
special relativity theory is to be looked upon as a special 

case of the general, in which q s have constant values (4). 
p.v 

This signifies, according to what has been said before, a 
total neglect of the influence of gravitation. We get 
one important approximation if we consider the case 
when // \ differ from (4) only by small magnitudes (com 
pared to I) where we can neglect small quantities of the 
second and higher orders (first asjK e.t of the approxima 
tion.) 

Further it should be assumed that within the >pace- 

, 
time region considered, f] s at infinite distances (JIMIIL: 

the word infinite in a spatial sense) can, by a suitable choice 
of co-ordinates, tend to the limiting values (4); /.<., we con 
sider only those gravitational fields which can be regarded 
as produced by masses distributed over finite regions. 

\Ve can assume that this approximation should lead to 
Newton s theory. For it however, it is necessary to treat 
the fundamental equations from another |M>in<t <>f view. 
Let us consider the motion of a particle according to the 
equation (4fi). In the case of the special relativity theory, 
the components 



156 I ltl.NCll Lh OF KELATivm 

can take any values : This signifies that any 

-- y + (;;;; >%< g y 

can appear which is less than the velocity of light in 
vacuum (r <1). If we finally limit ourselves to the 
consideration of the case when /,- is small compared to the 
velocity of light, it signifies that the components 

/( 1 <k 2 /- .I 

.>) 8oiilv Juiit*iio- ivf r^ ui f lv<wx 



can be treated as small quantities, whereas is equal In 

1, up to the second-order magnitudes (the second point of 
view for approximation). 

Now we see that, according to the first view of approxi 

mation, the magnitudes \~ s are all small quantities of 
at least the first order. A glance at (4(5) will also show, 
that in this equation according to the second view of 
approximation, we are only to take into account those 
terms for which /x,=v=4. 

By limiting ourselves only to terms of the lowest order 
we get instead of (46), first, the equations : 






= f \ i- where ds=<1s t =<//. 



or by limiting ourselves only to those terms which according 
to the first stand-point are approximations of the first 
order, 



,/ .x, r 4 4 -I 

,// -i J- 



<;I.M.K.\I.I>I.I> niKoio 01 KKLATIVITY l">? 

It we further ;tume that the gravitation-field is 
quasi-static, i.e., it is limited only to the case when the 
matter producing the gravitation-Hold is moving slowh 
(relative to the velocity of light) we can neglect the 
differentiations of the positional co-ordinates on the ni;ht- 
hand side with respect to time, so that \ve get -idj lt 

<" 9</4 + 

11171 ,fi.- T =-i a^ (, = , a, ) 

Tins i> the equation [of motion of a material point 
according to Newton s theory, where ff tt / t plays the part of 
gravitational potential. The remarkable thing in the 
result is that in the first-approximation of motion of the 
material point, only the component y tl of the fundamental 
tensor appears. 

Let us now turn to the h eld-equation (5o). In this 
case, we have to re mem her that the energy-tensor of 
matter is exclusively defined in a narrow sense bv the 
density/* of matter, >.<-., by the second member on the 
right-hand side of 58 [(">Sa, or 5M>)]. If we make the 
necessary approximations, then all component vanish 
except 

T , , = i* ~ T 

On the left-hand sidr of (r,:)) the second term is an 
infinitesimal of the second order, so that the first leads to 
the following term- in the approximation, which are rather 
interesting fur us ; 

6 r^ i 4 a [>"! 4 a r /u/ i a r^i 

a-l J f e-.L 2 J + a. ,L J 8^L .J- 

By neglecting all different iat ions with regard to time, 
this leads, when ^=^=4, to the expression 

_! / 6 2 . /, ,6 - >,,, , a 2 :/,, v x 

-^ ( 6"" + 6 - + 6 <7 "- 



158 i IM\( IIM.K OK ULLATIMIN 

The last of the equations (53) thus leads to 
(68) VY,,=^- 

The equations (67) and (68) together, ai>e equivalent to 
Newton s law of gravitation. 

For the gravitation-potential we get from (67) and (68) 
the exp. 



(68a.) 



whereas the Newtonian theory for the chosen unit of time 
gi ves 



% I . 



wliere K denotes usually the 



gravitation-constant. 67xlO~ s : equating them we tret 



SirK 

(6!) * = = Ks7xlO-". 



$22 Behaviour of measuring rods and clocks in a 
statical gravitation-field. Curvature of light-rays. 
Perihelion-motion of the paths of the Planets. 

In order to obtain Newton a theory as a first approxi 
mation we had to calculate only //,.,, out of the 10 coni|X)- 
nt iits // of the gravitation-potential, for that is the only 

component which comes in the first approximate equal ion>- 
of motion of a material point in a gravitational field. 

We M-e however, that the other components of </ 

should also differ from the values- given in (1-) as required by 
the condition / = 1 . 



flF.N ERALISF.i) T1IKOHY OK HKLATIVJTY l">y 

For a heavy particle at the origin of co-ordinates and 
generating the gravitational field, we get as a first approxi 
mation the symmetrical solution of the equation : 



S is 1 or 0. according as p = o- or not and / is the quantity 



... 
On account of (68a) \VP have 

(70a) . . = 

where M denotes the mass generating the field. It is easy 
to verify that this solution satisfies approximately the 
field-equation outside the mass M. 

Let us now investigate the influences which the field 
ef mass M will have upon the metrical pro|>erties of the 
Held. Between the lengths and times measured locally on 
the one hand, and the differences in co-ordinutes d.r on the 

V 

other, \ve have the relation 



For a unit me:i8iiring rod, for example, placed parallel to 
the axis, we have to put 

./ = -1. i/.r,=,f.- s =,/., 4= o 
then -!=</ /-". 



100 PKixriPi.i. 01 i;i;i.\Ti\m 

If the unit measuring rod lies on the axis, the tirst of 
the equations ( r O) gives 



From both these relations it follows as a first approxi 
mation that 

(71) ,/. = !- 4 . 

The unit measuring rod appears, when referred to the 
co-ordinate-system, shortened by the calculated magnitude 
through the presence of the gravitational Held, when we 
place it radially in the field. 

Similarly we can get its co-ordinate-length in a 
tangential |x>sition, if we put for example 

(/x 2 = 1. </.",_ =</.( _, =</, =o , .i. 1 !! . .!.,=. 3 =O 

we then get 

i71a.) -!=. /, /!; = - "I 

The gravitational field has no influence upon the length 
of the rod, \vhon we put it tangentially in the field. 

Thus Euclidean geometry docs nol hold in the giavi- 
tational lield O\MI in the first approximation, if we conceive 
that one and the same rod independent of its position and 
its orientation can serve as the measure of the same 
extension. But a glance at (70a) and (fi!)) shows that the 
ex]>ected difference is much too small to l>e noticeable 
in the measurement of earth s surface. 

AVe would further investigate the rate of going of ;i 
i mil -clock- which is placed in a statical gravitational field. 
Mere we have for a period of the cluck 



:i \Ki; VI.ISKH TIIKiHiY OF KKI.ATI VITY Kil 

then we h:ive 



/,=! + 



I f " 



Therefore the clock goes slowly what it is place*! in 
the neighbourhood of ponderable masses. It follows from 
this that the spectral lines in the light coming to us from 
the surfaces of big stars should appear shifted towards the 
red end of the spectrum. 

Let us further investigate the path of light-rays in a 
statical gravitational Held. According to the special relati 
vity theory, tin* velocity of light is given by the equation 



thus also according to the generalised relativity theory it 
is given by the e<|ii:it ion 

(73 * >9 V*J (/ =0 

If the direction, >., the ratio d , : <l,<\ : //-, is gi\Mi. 
ihe ejii!ition (7:J) gives the magnitudes 



and with it the velocity, 



a 



jl .-> PR1NTIPLK OK KEJ-A.T1VTTV 

in the sense of the Kuclidean Geometry. vVe can easily see 
that, with reference to the co-ordinate system, the rays of 
light must appear curved in case // *s are not constants. 

If a be the direction perpendicular to the direction 
of propagation, we have, from II uy gen s principle, that 
light-rays ] (taken in Ihe plane (y, )] must suffer a 

curvature ^-? . 



A Light-ray 



Let us Hnd out the curvature which a light-ray suffers 
when it goes by a mass M at a distance A from it. If we 
use the co-ordinate system according to the above scheme, 
then the totsil bending B of light-rays (reckoned positive 
when it is eonca.ve to the origin) is given as ;i sufficient 
approximation bv 



where (?. ) and (70) gives 



, , 



\ ray of light just gra/ing the sun would suffer :i beml- 
ing of 1 7", whereas one coming by Jupiter would have 
a deviation of about -0:2". 






KD THKOKV OF KKLVTIVITY IM 

If we calculate the gravitation-field to a greater order 
of approximation and with it the corresponding path 
of a material particle of a relatively small (infinitesimal) 
mass we get a deviation of the following kind from the 
Kepler-Newtonian Laws of Planetary motion. The Kllipse 
of Planetary motion suffers ;i slow rotation in the direction 
of motion, of amount 

( 7. ) i .<= 7r ," S per revolution. 

T"c*(l " ) 

In this Formula ft signifies the semi-major axis, c, 
the velocity of light, measured in the usual way, f, the 
eccentricity, T, the time of revolution in seconds. 

The calculation gives for the planet Mercury, a rotation 
of path of amount 43" per century, corresponding suffi 
ciently to what has been found by astronomers (Leverrier). 
They found a residual perihelion motion of this planet of 
the given magnitude which can not I>e explained b\ the 
perturbation of the other planet-. 



NOTES 

Note 1. The fundamental electro-magnetic equation 
of Maxwell for stationary media an> : 

<mrlH=I 



D-//K 

According to Hertx and Hoaviside, these require modi 
fication in the case of moving bodies. 

Now it is known that due to motion alone there is a 
change in a vector /? given by 

( _ - - ) due to motion //, div \\ +enrl \Uu\ 
\ o / 

where is the vector velocity of the moving bodv and 
[Rw] the vector product, of \\ and //. 
Hence equations (1) and (2) become 

I- curl H= ~ +v div D-fcurl \ ect. [Dv]+pv (1-1) 



and 



K= -- |- div H -j- curl \Vrti. 



which gives linally, for p o and div H = O, 

+ n div l)=:r curl 111- Vwfc, Dl ) 

O / 



,H ) - 



166 PKINCIPT.K OK ItET.ATIVrn 

Let us consider a beam travelling along the ./--axis, 
with apparent velocity / (i.e., velocity with respect to the 
Hxed ether) in medium moving with velocity n, = n in the 
same direction. 

Then if the electric and magnetic vectors are 

f - A (x-vt) 
proportional to e , we have 

f-=/A, |j = -/Ar, |- = =0, ,/, = ;,. =0 

5." 6* dy 8- 



Since D = K E and B = /A H, we have 

. ... (1-22) 



/x (;-.) H,=cE v ... (2-23) 

Multiplying (1 23), by (2 28) 

/A K (f 7 ) 2 =C 2 

Hence (i -//) 2 =c s /^ = . 5f 

. . = + w, 
making Fresnelian convection co-efficient simply unity. 

Equations (1 21), and (^ ^l) may bo obtained more 
simply from physical considerations. 

According to Heaviside and Hertz, the real seat of 
both electric and magnetic polarisation is the moving 
medium itself. Now at a point which is tixed with respect 
to the ether, the rate of change of electric polarisation is 
5D 



NOTE* 167 

Consider a siab of matter moving with velocity n, 
along- the ./--axis, then even in a stationary field of 
electrostatic polarisation, that is, for a Held in which 

= o, there will be some- change in the polarisation of 

or 

the body due to its motion, given by u r . Hence we 

O <: 

must add this term to a purely temporal rate of change 
-^- . Doing this we immediately arrive at equations 

Of 

(T21) and (2 21) for the special case considered there. 

Thus the Hert/-Heaviside form of field equations gives 
unity as the value for the Fresnelian convection co-efficient. 
It has been shown in the historical introduction how this 
is entirely at variance with the observed optical facts. As 
a matter of fact, Larmor lias shown (Aether and Matter) 
that I I/ft 2 is not only sufficient but is also necessary, in 
order to explain experiments of the Arago prism type. 

A short summary of the electromagnetic experiments 
bearing on this question, has already been given in the 
introduction. 

According to Hertz and Heaviside the total polarisa 
tion is situated in the medium itself and is completely 
carried away by it. Thus the electromagnetic effect 
outside a moving medium should be proportional to K, the 
specific inductive capacity. 

Rvic/mtil showed in l^itl that when a charged condenser 
is rapidly rotated (the dielectric remaining stationary), 
the magnetic effect outside is proportional to K, the Sp. 
Ind. Cap. 

/, ,;/////,-// (Annaleu .lev IMiysik 1SSS, 1890) found that 
if the dielectric is rotated while the condenser remains 
stationary, the effect is proportional to K 1. 



168 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

Kickenwalil (Annaleu der Physik 1903, IVOV) rotated 
together both condenser and dielectric and fouud that the 
magnetic effect was proportional to the potential difference 
and to the angular velocity, but was completely independent 
of K. This is of course quite consistent with Rowland 
and Rb ntgeu. 

Blotidlot (Coinptes Reudus, 1 JOl) passed a current 
of air in a steady magnetic Held II,, (H =H,=0). If 
this current of air moves with velocity / , along the 
.F-axis, an electromotive force would be set up along the 
r-axis, due to the relative motion of matter and magnetic 
f-ubt s <>f induction. A pair of plates at .*= + a, will be 
charged up with density /i=D, = KE =K. n. H y /c. 
But Blundlot failed to detect any such effect. 

//. A. intsnn (Phil. Trans. Kuyal Sot-. 190i) repeated 
the experiment with a cylindrical condenser made of 
ebouy, rotating in a magnetic Held parallel to its own 
axi^ He observed a change proportional to K I and 
not to K. 

Thus the above set of electro-magnet ic experiments 
contradict the llcrt/.-lleaviside equations, and these must 
be abandoned. 

[P. C. M.] 

Not 2. Lur iii: Ti ii itxfoi m/i/ i<nt. 

Lorentz. \rrsuch einer theorie der elektri-chen uud 
optibfhon Ki - C lu ijinn^fn im bewegteii Korpern. 

(Leiden 1895). 

Lorent/.. Theory of .MK-ctrnns (English eilition), 
pages l:r---Dii. i30,also notes < >. 86, pages :;is. :;-:s. 

Lorentx. wanted to explain the (Vfichelson-Morley 
null-effect. In order to do 50, it was obviously necessary 
to explain tin- I it/.gerald COUtrACtlOD. Lorentx, worked 
on the hypothesis (hat an electron itself undergoes 



NOTES 169 

contraction when moving. He introduced new variables 
for the moving system defined by the following set of 
equations. 



and for velocities, used 

v.*=p*v, + i , v, l =(3r,, r r l =(3r, and p l =p/fi. 

With the help of the above set of equations, which is. 
known as the Lorentz transformation, he succeeded in 
showing how the Fitzgerald contraction results-! as a 
consequence of fortuitous compensation of opposing 
effects." 

It should be observed that the Lorentz transformation 
is not identical with the Einstein transformation. The 
Kinsteinian addition of velocities is quite different as 
also the expression for the relative" density of electricity. 

It is true that the Max we 11- Lorentz Held equations 
remain practical/ 1/ unchanged by the Lorentz transforma 
tion, but they ar>- changed to some slight extent. UUP 
marked advantage of the Einstein transformation con^i-t> 
in the fact that the Held equations of a moving system 
preserve exactly the same form as those of a stationary 
M -torn. 

It should also be noted that the l ; resin-Han convection 
coctKcient comes out in the theory of relativity as a direct 
consequence of Kin-tern - addition of velocities- and is 
quite independent o! any electrical theory nf mattrr. 

[P.C If.] 

Note 3. 

Lorent/., Theory of Klectrons (English edition), 
181, page 513. 



170 I ttlNrill.F MI RELATIVITY 

H. Poiucare, Sur la dynamujue electron, Rendiconti 
del circolo matematico di Palermo 21 (1906). 

[P. C. M.] 

Note 4. lielaticity Theorem <ai<l Kelativiiy-Principle. 

Lorentz showed that the Maxwell-Lorentz system 
of electromagnetic field-equations remained practically 
unchanged bv the Lorentz transformation. Thus the 
electromagnetic laws of Maxwell and Lorentz can be 
definitely proved " to be independent of the manner in 
which they arc referred to two coordinate systems which 
have a uniform translatory motion relative to each other." 
(See " Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies," page 5.) Thus 
so far as the electromagnetic laws are concerned, the 
principle of relativity ant he proved lo be fntf. 

But it is not known whether this principle will remain 
true in the case of other physical laws. We can always 
proceed on the assumption that it does remain true. Thus 
it is always possible to construct physical laws in such a 
way that they retain their form wln-n referred to moving 
coordinates. The ultimate ground for formulating physi 
cal laws in this way is merely a subjective conviction that 
the principle of relativity is universally true. There is 
no a priori logical neccs^it \ t!:;it it should be so. Hence 
the Principle of Relativity (so I ar as it is applied to 
phenomtMin other than electromagnetic ) must be regarded 
as a jjostiiliil.t.-, which we have u.-Mimed to be true, but for 
which \\v cannot adduce any definite proof, until after 
the generalisation is made and its consequences tested in 
the light of actual experience. 

[P. C. M.j 
Note 5. 

See " Kli-ctrodynamic> oi Moving Hodies," p. 5-8. 



VOTES 171 

Note 6. / />/,/ fymi/f aim in l/////-0jrj/r* l- onii. 

Equation! (/) :md (//) become when expanded into 
Cartesians : 

8*1 8*, a, 

^ a o " /> , 

o y o - o T 



,_. 

T a^ av^"" r 



8 MI, 8>", 9 , 

o >s~" ~" ^ =/>- 

a.-- a// 8r j 



Substituting ;c, , ,, 2 , .-i- 3> .r , for .<, ;/, r, and ir ; and p, , 

f.jj pj, p^ for pi( . t />"yi pit : ) ipi where /^= \/ l t 

We get, 

a s a^i, a^j "^ 

"8;r, ~ ? 8 

a? : 9m, ,-9j\ 
ar,~ aa-,~*9^ 

and multiplyinG: (2 1) by / \v<> get 

a/ * , a - , a/ - 1 

Now substitute 

=/a * = / I a id /V,=/ 4I= / it 

711 =/S 1 = ""/I S * , =/ 4 * = /, 



172 HI? I \CTPT.K OP RELATIVITY 

and \ve irct finally : 



8./. i a/,, 8/ S4 

d^t-^+iSt 88 ^ 

... (3) 



a/,, 



, 8/, 4 

+* 5 * 



8/41 , s/*. , a/.., 



[P. C. M.j 

Note 9. On the Constancy of the Velocity of /,//////. 

Page i:> refer also to page 6, of Einstein s paper. 

One of the two fundamental Postulates of the Principle 
of Relativity is that the velocity of light should remain 
constant whether the source is moving or stationary. It 
follows that even if a radiant source S move with a velocity 
u, it should always remain the centre of spherical wave- 
expanding outwards with velocitv c. 

At first sight, it may not appear clear why the 
velocity should remain constant. Indeed according to the 
theory of Ritz, the velocity should become c + it, when the 
source o! light moves towards the observer with the 
velocity n. 

Prof, de Sitter has given an astronomical argument for 
deciding between these two divergent views. Let u< 
suppose there is a double star of which one is revolving 
about the common centre of gravity in a circular orbit. 



VOTES 173 

Let the observer lie in the plane of the orbit, at a great 
distance A. 




The light emitted by the star when at the position A 

will be received by the observer after a time , while 

c + it 

the light emitted by the star when at the position B will 

be received after a time . Let T be the real half- 
c u 

period of the star. Then the observed ha If- period from 
B to A is approximately T *- and from A to B is 

T+ 2 -Al l . Now if ^ be comparable to T, then it 

is impossible that the observations should satisfy 
Kepler s Law. In most of the spectroscopic binary stars, 

-^-=- are not onlv of the same <>nler a> T, but are mostly 
c a 

much larger. For example, if ;<=!()() //// sec, T = b da\s, 
A/c = 33 years (corresponding to an annual parallax of -1"), 
then T i/^A/c.- - =o. The existence of the Spectroscupio 
binaries, and the fact that they follow Kepler s Law is 
therefore a proof thai c is not ad octed by the motion of 
the source. 

In a later memoir, replying t ^ the criticisms of 
Freun llich and (liinthiek that an apparent ecoontripity 
occurs in the motion proportional to / "A,;*, ",i being the 



17 t rillNCll LE Ot IIELATIVIIY 

maximum value of t> , the velocity of light emitted being 
7/,,=c + X", /t = Lorentz- Einstein 
/=! Ritz. 

Prof, de Sitter admits the validity of the criticisms. But 
he remarks that an upper value of k may be calculated from 
the observations of the double sar /3-Aurigae. For this star. 

The parallax 7r = OU", e = 005, w n = 110 /f-w/sec T = 3 96, 
A > 05 light-years, 
/ is < -OOe. 

Fji an experimental proof, see a paper by C. Majorana. 
Phil. Mag., Vol. 35, p. 1C,:}. 

[M. N. S.] 
Note 10. Urtl-tlcnuili, <>f Muctricity. 

It /> is the volume density in a moving system then 
p \ / ([ n -} is the corresponding quantity in the correspond 
ing volume in the fixed system, that is, in the system at 
rest, and hence it is termed the rest -density of electricity. 

[P. a li.] 

Note 11 (page 17). 

SpaM-limc Ir <}/<> r^ of lk: //>*/ uml I / .svv.W khnl, 
As we had already occasion to mention, Sommerfeld 
hag, in two papers on four dimensional geometry ( vWr, 
Annalen der Physik, Bd. 2, p. Tli) ; and Hd. :i: 1 ,, p. 640), 
translated the ideas of Minkowski into the language of four 
dimensional geometry. Instead of M inkowski s space-time 
vector of the first kind, he uses the more expressive term 
four-vector, thereby making it quite clear that it 
represents a directed quantity like a straight line, a force 
or a momentum, and has got 4 components, three in the 
direction of space-axes, and one in the direction of the 
time-axis. 



VOTKS I7. r ) 

The representation of the plane (defined by two straight 
lines) is much more difficult. In three dimensions, the 
plane can he represented by the vector perpendicular to 
itself. Hut that artifice is not available in four dimensions. 
For the perpendicular to a plane, we now have not a single 
line, but an infinite number of lines constituting a plane. 
This difficulty has been overcome by Minkowski in a very 
elegant manner which will become clear later on. 
Meanwhile we offer the following extract from the 
above mentioned work of Sommerfeld. 

(Pp. 755, Hd. Z-2, Ann. d. Pliysik.) 

" In order to have a better knowledge about the nature 
of the six-vector (which is the same thing HS Minkowski s 
space-time vector of the 2n<l kind) let us take the special 
case of a piece of piano, having unit area (contents), and 
the form of a parallelogram, bounded by the four-vectors 
//, , passing through the origin. Then the projection of 
this piece of plane on the .r// plane is given hv the 
projections w,, //, /,, r a of the four vectors in the 
combination 



Let us form in a similar manner all the six component of 
this plane <. Then six component* are not all independent 
but are connected 1>\ the following relation 



Further the contents ) < | of the piece of a plane is to 
be defined as the square rout of the sum of the squares of 
these six ipiantitio. In fact, 

i 4| =*, +#,+#,++#. +<*>*.- 

Let us now on the other hand take the ea-^e of the unit 
plane <j>* normal to $ ; we can call this plane the 



176 PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY 

Complement of <f>. Then we have the following relations 
between the components of the two plane : 



The proof of these assertions is as follows. Let ;/*, r* 
be the four vectors defining <*. Then we have the 
following relations : 



multiplying these equations by r* . ;/*-,or by r* . ?/* . 
we obtain 

<i>*: .$,1 + **, ,,=0 and <* y ^,, +^?. ^..,=0 
from which we have 



In a corresponding way we have 



whon the subscript (//) denotes the component of </> in 
the plane contained by the lines other than (; ). Therefore 
the theorem is proved. 
We have ^^*=^, <+.., 



r* r,+v* ?+? * r.+rfr,=0 

If we multiply these equations by v,, n,, r t , and 
subtract the second from the first, the fourth from the 
third we obtain 



XOTKS 177 

The ^eneral si i\- vector / is composed from the vectors 
*" in the following way : 



p and p* denoting the contents of the pieces of mutually 
perpend ic ihir planes composing / . The "conjugate 
Vector" f* (or it may be called the comi)lement of /*) is 
obtained by interchanging p and //* 
We have, 

f* = ,,* 4, + ,, $* 

We can verify that 

/*, = /.i etc. 

| / | - and (J f*} may be said to bo invariants of the six 
vectors, for their values are independent of the choice of 
the system of co-ordinates. 

[M. N. 8.] 
Note 12. Ligkt-tcfocity H* ti maximum. 

Page -2-J, and Electro-dynamics of Moving Bodies, 
p. 17. 

Flitting r = c ., and /r = c A, \ve get 



1 + (f-.r) (r-A)/c- c- -(-r- -(.r-fA)^-f , I 

= , ^-(.r + A) 
2<- -(.< + A) +J -A/c 



Thus f<r, so lorig as | .rA | >(). 

Thus the velocity of light is the absolute maximum 
velocity. We sh.il! i:n\v see the consequences of admitting 
a velocity W >r. 

Let A and B be separated by distance /, and let 
velocity of a -Signal " in the system S be W>r. Let the 



178 PRINCIPLE OF 11ELATIVITY 

(observing) system S have velocity -H 1 with respect to 
the system S. 

Then velocity of signal with respect to system S is 
Kivenbv 1T !**., 

Thus " time " from A to B as measured in S , i3 given 

^ nw- zggD -, ... ;_; ;. :.: 0) 

Now if r is less than e, then W being greater than c 
(by hypothesis) W is greater than v, i.e., W>v. 

Let W=? + /A and v = c A. 

Then Wr = (c {- n)(c A) = c- + (/* + X)c /zA. 

Now we can always choose v in such a way that Wv is 
greater than c-, since Wr is >c- if (/* + A)c yuA is >0. 

that is, if fji + \> .which can always be satisfied by 
a suitable choice of A. 

Thus for W><? we can always choose A in such a 
way as to make W?->e 2 , i.e., I Wr/c 2 negative. But 
\V / i>; always positive. Hence with W>c, we can 
always make f , the time from A lo B in equation (1) 
" negative." That is, the signal starting from A will reach 
B (as observed in system S ) in less than no time. Thus the 
effect will be perceived before the cause commences to act, 
i.e., the future will precede the past. Which is absurd. 
Hence we conclude that W>c is an impossibility, there 
can be no velocity greater than that of light. 

It is conceptually possible to imagine velocities greater 
than that of light, but such velocities cannot occur in 
reality. Velocities greater than c, will uot produce 
any effect. Causal effect of any physical type can never 

travel with a velocity greater than that of light. 

[P. C. M.] 



NOTES 179 

Notes 13 and 14. 

We have denoted the four-vector t by the matrix 
I w i <0 2 W 3 w I It- is then at once seen that &> denotes 
the reciprocal matrix 



! 

>4 

It is now evident that while <> =w\, w = A~ w 

[<..] The vector-product of the four-vector w and -t 
may be represented by the combination 

[w] = w Sta 

It is now easy to verify the formula ./ ! = A M /A. 
Supposing for the sake of simplicity that / represents the 
vector-product of two four-vectors a>, <v, we have 



= [ A~ a w,sA A " *w 

= A- 1 [(^-,va>JA = A 
Now remembering that generally 



Where p, p* are scalar (|iiantities, <^, <* are two 
mutually perpendicular unit planes, there is no difficulty 
in seeming that 

/ = A-VA. 

Note 15. The rector product (trf). (L\ 3(>). 
This represents the vector product of ; four- vector and 
a six-vector. Now as combinations of this type are of 



180 l i;l\( ll I.K OF KEI.ATIVITY 

frequent occurrence in this paper, it will be better to form 
an idea of their geometrical meaning. The following 
is taken from the above mentioned paper of Sommerfeld. 

" We can also form a vectorial combination of a four- 
vector and a six-vector, giving us a vector of the third 
type. If the six-vector be of a special type, i.e., a piece 
of plane, then this vector of the third type denotes the 
parallelepiped formed of this four-vector and the comple 
ment of this piece of plane. In the general case, the 
product will be the geometric sum of two parallelepipeds, 
but it can always bo represented by a four-vector of the 
1st type. For two pieces of 3-space volumes can always 
be added together by the vectorial addition of their com 
ponents. So by the addition of two 3-space volumes, 
we do not obtain a vector of a more general type, but 
one which can always be represented by a four-vector 
(loc, cit. p. 75!)). The state of affairs here is Hie same as 
in the ordinary vector calculus, where by the veetor- 
mu Implication of a vector of the first, and a vector of the 
second type (/. ., a polar vector), we obtain a vector of the 
first tvpe (axial vector). Tl;c I unnal scheme of this 
multiplication is taken from the three-dimensional ease. 

Let A=(A,. A,,, A.) denote a vector of the first 
type, B = (B,, . , B -.,, B., ,) denote a vector of the second 
type. From this lust, let us form three special vectors of 
the first kind, namely - 

B,=(B rr , .B,,, B, s n 

B, = (B,., B,,, B y .V-(B l4 = -B tl . B,,=0). 

B.. =(B,,, 1} ., B..)J 

Since H , , is zero, B, is perpendicular to the /-axis. 
The /-component of the vector-product of A and B is 
equivalent to the scalar product of A and U,, i.e., 
^A, B,,+A B,, +A. B,,. 



MHKS 181 

We see easily that this coincides with the usual rule 
for the vector-product, c. y., fory = . . 

= A, B,,-A.. B..,, 



Correspondingly let us define in the four-dimciibional 
case the product (P/) of any four- vector P and the six- 
vector./". The /-component (j = -r, //, :, or /) is given by 

(P/, ) = p,/v , + ?,/, , + p,,/, , + p./;, , 

Eac-h one of these components is obtained as the scalar 
product of P, and the vector f , which is perpendicular to 
j-axis, and is obtained from / bv the ruley , = [(f }1 , J , v > 



We can also find out here the geometrical significance 
of vectors of the third type, when ,/ =<, /.<?.,./ represents 
only one plane. 

We replace </> by the parallelogram defined by the two 
four-vectors U, V, and let us pass over to the conjugate 
plane </>*, which is formed by the perpendicular four-vectors 
U*, V.* Tiie components of (P</>) are then eijual to the 
1 three-rowed under-determiuants 1), D v D ; Di of the 
matrix 

P, P. P. P/ 

U,* U,* U,* I 

\ V v * V : * \ ,* 

Leavin aside the tirst column we obtain 



which coincides with (P M according to our di-linition. 



182 



I llJNCll LE OF RELATIVITY 



Examples of this type of vectors will be found ou 
page 36, * = /t-F, the electrical-rest-force, and ^ = i>o/,* 
ibe magnetic- rest-force. The rest-ray I) = ?o> [<I>i/T] * also 
belong to the same type (page 89). It is easy to show 
that 



When (w n w 2 , o),)=o, 
dimensional vector 



=/. il reduces to the thi-ee- 



Since in this case, *!=oj 4 F 14 =r, (the electric force) 

^ l = i< 1 }J\^r=m J , (the magnetic force) 



we have (Q) = 



e, 



m, 



, analogous to the 
Poynting-vector. 
[M. N. S.] 
Note 16. 27*e eleclric-rcd force. (Page 37.) 

The four- rector ^> = o-F which is called b\ r Minkowaki 
the clectric-rest-force (elektrische Rub-Kraft) is very 
closely connected to Lorentz a Ponderomotive force, or 
the force acting on a moving charge. If i> i? the density 
of charge, we have, when e=l, //.= ], / .<"., for free space 



Nn\v since p ( ,=: 
\Vu have 




l V 2 V 2 



o* 4 =p[d.+ j (* .-*)] 

J>. ^ c liavc j)ul the c 



X.J>. \\\ have j)ut the component- of e equivalent 
to ( /,, dy, </ : ), and the components of in equivalent to 



NOTES 18i 

// , // a //.), in accordance with the notation used in 
Lorent/ s Theory of Electrons, 
\Ye have therefore 



i. /., /j ( , (<,, </>, </>., ) represents the force acting on the 
electron. Compare Lorent/, Theory of Electrons, page 14. 
The fourth component <, when multiplied by /j () 
represents /-times the rate at which work is done by 
the moving electron, for />,, < 4 .=i p [> ,<!* + ?v7 + r.c?.] = 
r Pn</ > i+ r y Po^2 + r .- Po^s- -%/ _ l times the power pos 
sessed by the electron therefore represents the fourth 
component, or the time component, of the force-four- 
vector. This component was first introduced by Poineare 
in 1900. 

The four-vector ^ = /wK* has a similar relation to 
the force acting on a moving magnetic pole. 

Note 17. Operator " Lor" ( 1:2, p. 11). 

\ \ p\ 

The operation ^- -5, Q ~, g ( , j which plays in 
four-dimensional mechanics a role similar to that of 

/ o cs o \ 

the operator I / fC-, + j o >+ ^ "aT= V ) m three-dimen 

sional geometry has been called by ^TinUowski Lorent /- 
Operation or shortly lor in honour of H. A. Lorent/, 
the discoverer of the theorem of relativity. Later writers 
have sometimes used the symbol Q to denote this 
operation. In the above-mentioned paper (Annalen der 
Physik, p. (ill), Bd. 33) Sommerfeld has introduced the 
terms, Div (divergence), Hot ( Rotation), (I rad (gradient) 
as four-dimensional extensions of the corresponding three- 
dimensional operations in place of the general svmho! 
lor. The ph\ sical si^ni ii-iiu-e of thes- operations will 



184- I lUNCIl I.K ()! UKLATIVITY 

become clear when along with Minkowski s met hod of 
treatment we also study the geometrical method of 
Sommerfeld. Minkowski begins here with the case of 
lor S, where 8 is a six- vector (^pace-time vector of the 
2nd kind). 

This being a complicated case, we take the simpler 
catffe of lor *, 

where A- is a four- vector = j -fj, *, A-O * 4 | 
and .s = i *, 



The following geometrical method is taken from Som- 
m erf eld. 

Scalar Divergence Let A 2 denote a small four-dimen 
sional volume of any shape in the neighbourhood of the 
space-time point Q, //S denote the three-dimensional 
bounding surface of A2, / be the outer normal to ifS. 
Let S be anv four-vector, P N its normal component. 
Then 

Div S = Lim 

Now if for A 2 we choose the four-dimensional paral 
lelepiped with sides (//>-,, //.>, ^.r n , (?.r 4 } } we have then 

O i O 2 C/ 3 O i 

If f denotes a space-time vector of the second kind, lor 
/ is equivalent to a space-time vector of the first kind. The 
geometrical significance can be thus brought out. We have 
seen fiat the operator lor beirives in every respect like 
a four-vector. The vector-product of a four-vector and a 
six-vector is again a four-vector. Therefore it is easy 



XOTKS 185 

tn see that lor S will lie a four-vector. Let us find 
thr component of tliis f on r- vector in any direction *. 
l.i t S denote the three-space whieh passes through the 
point Q (./,, .r,, .r.,, .r 4 ) and is perpendicular to ,v, AS a 
very small part of it in the region of Q, tfn- is an element 
of its two-dimensional surface. Let the perpendicular 
to this surface lying in the space be denoted by //, and 
let / . denote the component of f in the plane of (*//) 
which is evidently conjugate to the plane tlv. Then the 
v-component of tho vector divergence of / because the 
operator lor multiplies / vectorially) 

= Divf.=Lim Ih^?. 

A *=0 AS 

Where the integration in </<r is to be extended over 
the whole surface. 

If now x is selected as the .r-direction, A* is then 
a three-dimensional parallelopiped with the sides t1i/ } <h, 
i//, then we have 



and generallv 

= + + - + 



H.-nce the four-components of the four- vector lor S 
or Div. / is a four-vector with the components given on 
pag.- 1-2. 

According to the formulae of space geometry, D, 
denote-; a parallelopiped laid in the (//->0 space, formed 

out of the vectors (P, P. ?,), ( IT * r* U*) (v* vt V*,). 



18H I lilXCII LK 01 UKLATIVITY 

D, is therefore the projection on the y-:-l space of 
1he peralielopiped formed out of these three four- vectors 
(P, U*, V*), and could as well be denoted by Dyxl. 
We see directly that the four-vector of the kind represent 
ed by (D,, D y , D., D,) is perpendicular to the parallele 
piped formed by (P U* V*). 

Generally we have 

(P/)=PD + P*D*. 

.. The vector of the third type represented by (P/) 
is given by the geometrical sum of the two four-vectors of 
the first type PD and P*D*. 

[M. N. S.] 







PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE 
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKE 

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY 



QC 
6 



Einstein, Albert 

The principle of relat 



P&A 
Sci